mwa p-56 metro central transfer station (mcts) … p...mwa p-56 metro central transfer station...

MWA P-56 Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

April 5, 2018

4198 Delaware Avenue

Des Moines, Iowa 50313

4125 Westown Parkway, Suite 100

West Des Moines, Iowa 50265

SECTION 00 0101

PROJECT TITLE PAGE

PROJECT MANUAL

FOR MWA P-56 - METRO CENTRAL TRANSFER STATION (MCTS) TARPING AREA ENCLOSURE

OWNER:

Metro Waste Authority

Attn: Yuta Naganuma

300 East Locust Street, Suite 100

Des Moines, IA 50309

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER:

Shive-Hattery, Inc.

4125 Westown Parkway, Suite 100

West Des Moines, IA 50266

BIDS DUE:

05-02-2018

10:00 A.M.

Metro Waste Authority Attn: Yuta Naganuma 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309

ISSUED FOR:

Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

END OF SECTION

MWA P-56 – Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

Project # 4181220

PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0101-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

CERTIFICATIONS PAGE

Project # 4181220 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

00 0105-1

SECTION 00 0105

CERTIFICATIONS PAGE

STATE OF IOWA

I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Iowa. Type Name Here Printed or typed name: Todd C. Wehr, AIA __________________________________ __________ Signature Date License Expires: 6-30-2019 Pages, Sheets, or Divisions covered by this Seal: Div 00, 01, 07, 08, 09, 10 11

I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. __________________________________ _______ Signature Date Printed or typed name: Alexander C. Brase, P.E. License Number: 23203 My license renewal date is: 12/31/2019 Pages, Sheets, or Divisions covered by this Seal: Div 03. 05, 13

WCDEGRO

Image

WCDEGRO

Image


Project # 4181220

CERTIFICATIONS PAGE 00 0105-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. __________________________________ __________ Signature Date Printed or typed name: Charles S. Heldenbrand, P.E. License Number: 13865 My license renewal date is: 12/31/2018 Pages, Sheets, or Divisions covered by this Seal: Div 22, 23

I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. __________________________________ __________ Signature Date Printed or typed name: Edin Smailovic, P.E. License Number: 21953 My license renewal date is: 12/31/2018 Pages, Sheets, or Divisions covered by this Seal: Div 26

END OF SECTION

WCDEGRO

Image

WCDEGRO

Image


TABLE OF CONTENTS


00 0110-1

SECTION 00 0110

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 0101 - Project Title Page

00 0105 - Certifications Page

00 0110 - Table of Contents

00 1113 - Advertisement for Bids

00 1115 – Notice of Public Hearing

00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders

00 2115 – Supplementary Instructions to Bidders

00 4000 – Procurement Forms and Supplements

00 4100 - Bid Form

00 4100.01 – Bidder Status Form

00 4100.02 – Authorization to Transact Business Worksheet

00 4100.03 – Non-Collusion Affidavit

00 4201 – Schedule of Bid Prices

00 5000 – Contracting Forms and Supplements

00 5200 - Agreement Form

00 6325 – Substitution Request Form

00 7200 - General Conditions

00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 1000 – Summary

01 2000 – Price and Payment Procedure

01 2600 – Contract Modification Procedures

01 3000 – Administrative Requirements

01 4000 – Quality Requirements

01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 6000 – Product Options and Substitution Requests

MWA P56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

Project # 4181220

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

01 7000 – Execution and Closeout Requirements

01 7329 – Cutting and Patching

01 7800 – Closeout Submittals

01 7900 – Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE

03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

DIVISION 05 -- METALS

05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing

05 5119 – Metal Grating Stairs

05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings

05 5313 – Bar Gratings

DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 4100 – Metal Panel Non-Insulated Panels

07 6100 – Metal Roofing

07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

07 9000 – Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS

08 1100 – Steel Doors and Frames

08 3323 - High Performance Overhead Coiling Doors

08 7100 – Door Hardware

08 8000 - Glazing

DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES

09 9000 – Paints and Coatings

DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES

10 1400 – Signage

10 4416 – Fire Extinguishers

DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT

11 1300 – Loading Dock Equipment

DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 3419 - Metal Building Systems


Project # 4181220

TABLE OF CONTENTS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 00 0110-3

DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING

22 0500 – Common Work Results for Plumbing

22 0529 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 0553 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 1315 – Process Drain and Vent Piping

22 1318 – Process Drain Piping Specialties

22 1513 – General Service Compressed Air Piping

DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 0500 – Common Work Results for HVAC

23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

23 3416 - Fans

23 3700 - Louvers

DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL

26 0500- Common Work Results for Electrical

26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

26 0533.13 - Conduit

26 2416 - Panelboards

26 5100 - Interior Lighting

END OF SECTION

MWA P56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

Project # 4181220

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS


00 1113-1

SECTION 00 1113

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

PROJECT: MWA P-56 - METRO CENTRAL TRANSFER STATION (MCTS) TARPING AREA ENCLOSURE

4198 Delaware Avenue Des Moines, IA 50313

BIDS DUE: Wednesday, May 2, 2018 at 10:00 AM

TO:

THE Owner (HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO AS Owner ):

Metro Waste Authority Attn: Yuta Naganuma 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309

Architect (hereinafter referred to as Architect/Engineer):

Shive-Hattery, Inc. 4125 Westown Parkway, Suite 100 West Des Moines, IA 50266

TO: POTENTIAL BIDDERS

Sealed bids will be received by the Owner at Metro Waste Authority, 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100, Des Moines, IA 50309, until 10:00 AM, Central Time, on Wednesday, May 2, 2018, at which time the Bids received will be opened and publicly read by the Authority’s representative. A hearing will be conducted on the RFP at a meeting of the Authority to be held at the Authority’s office at 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100, Des Moines, IA 50309 at 5:45 PM on May 16, 2018, at which time and place any person may appear and file objections to the proposed RFP for said public improvements. Sealed bids previously received for said project will be presented and considered by the Authority immediately after the meeting has concluded. Bids received will be acted upon at such time and place or at such later time and place as may then be fixed.

The general nature of the work is as follows: Design coordination with pre-engineered metal building fabricator to include an addition with equipment platforms and catwalk. Work must commence on or about August 20, 2018 and be substantially complete by September 20, 2018. The Transfer Station will be shut down to truck traffic during this time. All concrete work needs to occur between August 20, 2018 and September 20, 2018. After September 20, 2018, contractor may work outside of operating hours to complete work.

Bidding documents may be examined at the following location(s):

Action Reprographics, actionrepro.com, 5037 NE 14th Street, Des Moines, IA

Construction Update Plan Room isqft.com, 221 Park Street, Des Moines, IA 50309

Copies of the Bidding documents may be obtained by Bidders and Subbidders at Action Reprographics, 5037 NE 14th Street, Des Moines, IA, (515) 288-2146, www.actionrepro.com, in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Electronic documents will be issued at no charge to the bidder; hard copies requested will be at the cost of printing plus delivery method to the bidder.

http://www.actionrepro.com/

http://www.isqft.com/


Project # 4181220

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 1113-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

Each Bidder shall accompany the Bid with a Bid security, in a separate envelope, as security that the successful bidder will enter into a contract for the work bid upon and will furnish after the award of the contract corporate surety bond or bonds, acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of the contract, in an amount equivalent to one hundred percent of the amount of the contract. The bidder's security shall be in an amount equivalent to 5% of the bid amount, and shall be in the form of a cashier's or certified check drawn on a bank in Iowa or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States of America, or a certified bank share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States of America or a bid bond with corporate surety satisfactory to the Owner. The bid security will be held by the Owner until a contract is fully executed and bonds are approved by the Owner.

All Bidders are required to provide a statement regarding their residency status as required by 875 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 156.

No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 days after the date of the scheduled closing time for the receipt of bids.

Bidders shall be prepared to submit a performance bond and payment bond conditioned on the faithful performance of the contract. Out-of-state bidders shall be prepared to submit an Out-of-State Contractor Bond to the Iowa Division of Labor in accordance with Chapter 91C of the Code of Iowa.

By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa labor to the extent lawfully required under Iowa law.

It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsible, responsive bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the bidding requirements. The Owner reserves the right to waive informalities or irregularities. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids.

Published by order of the Metro Waste Authority.

END OF SECTION


NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING


00 1115-1

SECTION 00 1115

NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING

MWA P-56 - METRO CENTRAL TRANSFER STATION (MCTS) TARPING AREA ENCLOSURE

To Whom It May Concern:

You are hereby notified that at 5:45 PM, Central Time on May 16, 2018 at the Metro Waste Authority office located at 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100, Des Moines, IA 50309, there will be a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimated cost of the project. Any persons interested may appear and file objections to the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, or cost of such improvement.

The Project consists of Design coordination with pre-engineered metal building fabricator to include an addition with equipment platforms and catwalk. Work must commence on or about August 20, 2018 and be substantially complete by September 20, 2018. The Transfer Station will be shut down to truck traffic during this time. All concrete work needs to occur between August 20, 2018 and September 20, 2018. After September 20, 2018, contractor may work outside of operating hours to complete work.

The location of the project is as follows: 4198 Delaware Avenue, Des Moines, IA 50313

Proposed drawings and specifications may be examined at www.actionrepro.com.

Published by order of the Metro Waste Authority.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220

NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING 00 1115-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS


00 2113-1

SECTION 00 2113


AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders (1997 Edition), is the Instructions to Bidders and is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects State Office as follows:

AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone: 515-244-7502 Fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org

Refer to Document 00 2115 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders for additions and amendments to these Instructions to Bidders.

END OF SECTION

http://www.aiaiowa.org/

MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Enclosure

Project # 4181220

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Enclosure

SUPPLEMENTARY


Project # 4181220 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

00 2115-1

SECTION 00 2115

SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

The following Supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "Instructions to Bidders", American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A701 - 1997. Where any Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or clause or portion thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the unaltered portions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or clause or portion thereof shall remain in effect.

ARTICLE 1: DEFINITIONS

No Supplements

ARTICLE 2: BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

Add the following Subparagraphs to Paragraph 2.1:

2.1.5 Work shall commence on or about August 20, 2018, and must be substantially complete by September 20, 2018.

2.1.6 The Bidder is fully experienced and properly qualified to perform the class of work provided for herein, and is properly licensed, equipped, organized and financed to perform such work. The Bidder shall act as an independent contractor and not as the agent of Owner in performing the Contract. The Bidder shall maintain complete control over its employees and all of its subcontractors. Nothing contained in this Contract or any subcontract awarded by Bidder shall create any contractual relationship between any such subcontractor and Owner. The Bidder shall perform all work in accordance with its own methods subject to compliance with the Contract and shall adhere to the schedule of progress and completion deadlines.

2.1.7 The Bidder has included all work associated with the Contract Documents in their Bid, regardless of any direction given by or dictated by any Bid Depositories, other Agencies or Municipalities not specifically party to the Contract. The Bidder shall coordinate the scopes of work to be performed by themselves and their individual Subcontractors prior to bid sufficiently to ensure that all work associated with the Contract Documents, regardless of the Drawing or Specification Section in which they appear, are covered in the Bid.

2.1.8 The Bidder has familiarized themselves with federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting performance of the Work and employment of labor.

2.1.9 The Bidder has not participated in collusion or fraud in preparation of the bid for this project and shall provide a non-collusion affidavit to accompany the submitted bid.

Add the following Paragraph 2.2 and Subparagraphs 2.2.1 thru 2.2.2:

2.2.1 A “Resident Bidder” means a person or entity authorized to transact business in the State of Iowa and having a place of business for transacting business within the state at which it is conducting and has conducted business for at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement for the public improvement. If another state or foreign country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the more stringent definition is applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country.


Project # 4181220


00 2115-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

2.2.2 A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country other than Iowa if that state our foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state of foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state of foreign county. The preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident.

ARTICLE 3: BIDDING DOCUMENTS

Delete Subparagraph 3.1.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph 3.1.1:

3.1.1 Copies of the Bidding documents may be obtained by Bidders and Subbidders at Action Reprographics, 5037 NE 14th Street, Des Moines, IA, (515) 288-2146, www.actionrepro.com, in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Electronic copies are available at no charge to the bidder; hard copies are available at cost of printing and delivery method.

Add subparagraphs 3.2.1.1, 3.2.1.2 and 3.2.1.3 as follows:

3.2.1.1 If a discrepancy between different parts of the contract documents exists, the more stringent or higher cost requirement shall apply.

3.2.1.2 Bidders will not be entitled to any additional compensation or any extension of the Contract Time for conditions that can be determined by examining the site and the Bidding and Contract Documents.

3.2.1.3 Prior to bid, it is the responsibility of each bidder, sub-contractor, and material supplier to examine the documents for the work of all trades that may have an effect on the work that the bidder, sub-contractor, or supplier intends to perform.

Add subparagraphs 3.3.2.1 and 3.3.2.2 as follows:

3.3.2.1 Substitution requests must be submitted by prospective bidders on 00 4325 - Substitution Request Form. Substitution requests from manufacturers, distributors, or other entities that are not bidding as a general contractor will be rejected without review.

3.3.2.2 Approval of a substitution request does not in any way diminish the contractor's obligation to meet the specified requirements or the Architect's design intent.

Delete Subparagraph 3.4.3 and replace with the following:

3.4.3 Addenda will be issued in order to be received by all planholders of record not less than 48 Hours prior to the date and time that bids are due, except an addendum withdrawing the Request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids.

ARTICLE 4: BIDDING PROCEDURES

4.1 Preparation of Bids

Add the following Subparagraph 4.1.9:

4.1.9 The Contractor shall take note and comply with all governing laws, rules, and regulations affecting the Work. This may include such laws, rules, and regulations as:

4.1.9.1. Licensing of Contractors for special requirements, e.g. hazardous waste removal.


Project # 4181220



00 2115-3

4.1.9.2. Requirements for special construction permits.

4.1.9.3. Exemption from sales tax, if applicable.

4.1.9.4. Wage rates and employment requirements when required by law or by Owner.

4.1.9.5. Local labor requirements.

4.1.9.6. Non-discriminatory hiring practices.

4.2 Bid Security

Delete Subparagraph 4.2.1 and substitute the following Subparagraph:

4.2.1 Each Bidder shall accompany the bid with a bid security, in a separate envelope, as security that the successful Bidder will enter into a Contract for the work bid upon and will furnish after the award of the Contract, a corporate surety bond or bonds, acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of the Contract, in an amount equivalent to 100% of the amount of the Contract. The Bidder's security shall be in an amount equivalent to 5% of the Bid Amount, and shall be in the form of a cashier's or certified check drawn on a bank in Iowa or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, or a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States or a bid bond from a corporate surety satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Paragraph 6.2. Bid security of the successful bidder will be held by the Owner until an Agreement is fully executed and bonds are received and acceptable to the Owner.

4.3 Submission of Bids

Delete Subparagraph 4.3.1 and substitute the following Subparagraphs 4.3.1 and Subparagraph(s):

4.3.1 All copies of the Bid and other documents, not including the bid security, required to be submitted with the Bid, shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The bid security, if any, shall be submitted in a separate sealed opaque envelope. Each envelope shall bear the return address of the bidder and shall be addressed as follows:

TO: Metro Waste Authority

Address: 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100


BID FOR: MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

4198 Delaware Avenue


or as applicable:

BID SECURITY FOR: MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

4.3.1.1 If the Bid, the bid security, if any, and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid are sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mail envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof.


Project # 4181220


00 2115-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid

Add Subparagraph 4.4.1.1 as follows:

4.4.1.1 The specific time period during which Bids may not be withdrawn shall be as stated on the Bid Form bound herein.

ARTICLE 5: CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

5.1 Opening of Bids

Paragraph 5.1 No Supplements

Delete subparagraph 5.3.1 and substitute the following subparagraph:

5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract or multiple contracts to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder(s) provided the Bid(s) has/have been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does/do not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid or Bids received and to accept the Bid(s) which, in the Owner’s judgment, is/are in the Owner’s best interests.

ARTICLE 6: POST-BID INFORMATION

Add Subparagraph 6.1.1 as follows:

6.1.1 Out-of-state-bidders shall furnish documentation prior to execution of the Agreement that confirms the Bidder is in compliance with Chapter 91C Construction Contractors and Chapter 490 Business Corporation Division XV Foreign Corporations of the Code of Iowa.

ARTICLE 7: PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

No Supplements.

ARTICLE 8: FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

Add the following Paragraph 8.1 Execution of Agreement:

8.1 The selected Bidder shall, within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award, sign and deliver the required number of executed counterparts of the Agreement along with any required attached documents. Within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of executed documents from the selected Bidder, the Owner shall deliver one fully executed counterpart to the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tapring Area Enclosure

PROCUREMENT FORMS AND

SUPPLEMENTS


00 4000-1

SECTION 00 4000

PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 FORMS

A. Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the procurement requirements.

B. Instructions to Bidders: AIA A701.

C. Substitution Request Form (During Procurement): 00 4325.

D. Bid Form: Section 00 4100 - Bid Form.

E. Procurement Form Supplements:

1. Bid Security Form: AIA 310-2010 "Bid Bond".

F. Representations and Certifications:

1. Non-Collusion Affidavit: 00 4100.03.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AIA A310 - Bid Bond; 2010.

B. AIA A701 - Instructions to Bidders; 2007.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

http://www.aia.org/


Project # 4181220

PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS

00 4000-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


BID FORM


00 4100-1

SECTION 00 4100

BID FORM


BID TO: Metro Waste Authority 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 DELIVER BID TO: Metro Waste Authority

Attn: Yuta Naganuma 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100


SUBMITTED BY: _____________________________________________________________ (BIDDER TO ENTER NAME AND ADDRESS).

Bidder's Full Name _________________________

Address _________________________

City, State, Zip_________________________

NOTE: Submit one copy of this Bid Form. All blanks shall be completed. Only bids on this form will be accepted. Submit Bid Security, if required, in separate envelope. Bidder shall carefully review the Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders prior to completing this form.

1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the schedule indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement for Bids and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 30 days after the day of Bid opening.

2. The undersigned Bidder submits, herewith, bid security in accordance with the terms set forth in the Advertisement for Bids and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.

3. The Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged:

DATE NUMBER

4. BIDDER has visited the site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work.


Project # 4181220

BID FORM Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

00 4100 - 2

5. BIDDER is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work.

6. BIDDER will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents per Section 00 4201 Schedule of Bid Prices

7. BIDDER agrees that the Work will be completed in accordance with the project schedule in the Advertisement for Bids.

8. Bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or in connection with any other person, organization, or corporation bidding on the work.

9. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:

a. Required Bid Security in the amount of _________ and in the form of _______________. SUBMITTED IN A SEPARATE ENVELOPE.

b. Section 00 4201 - Schedule of Bid Prices.

c. A tabulation of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations required to be identified in this Bid (see Section 00 4201).

d. Non-collusion affidavit.

e. A completed copy of the Bidder Status Form, Document 00 4100.01.

10. This Bid submitted on ___________________, 20____.

11. State Contractor License No._________________________.

12. The bidder shall not make any revisions to the bid forms or the Schedule of Bid Prices and shall not devise any alternates other than those provided. Any such notes, revisions, or comments shall be grounds for rejection of the bid as not being responsive.

13. Complete the applicable item(s) listed below. If this Bid is submitted by an agent of BIDDER, attach a current Power-of-Attorney certifying the agent's authority to bind the BIDDER.

If BIDDER IS:

An Individual

By: ____________________________ _________________________________

(signature of individual) (typed or printed name)

doing business as: ______________________________________________________

Business Address: ______________________________________________________

Phone No. ___________________________


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 00 4100-3

A Partnership

By: _______________________________________________________________

(Firm Name)

____________________________________ _______________________________

(signature of general partner) (typed or printed name)

Business Address: ______________________________________________________

Phone No. _____________________________

A Corporation

By: ___________________________________________________________________

(Corporation Name)

State of Incorporation: ____________________________________________________

By: ___________________________________________________________________

(signature of person authorized to sign)

_______________________________________________________________________

(typed or printed name and title)

Attest: ________________________________________________________________

(Secretary)

Business Address: _______________________________________________________

Phone No. ______________________________

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

00 4100 - 4


BIDDER STATUS FORM


00 4100.01-1

SECTION 00 4100.01

BIDDER STATUS FORM

To be completed by all bidders Part A Please circle Yes or No for each of the following:

YES NO My company is authorized to transact business in Iowa (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the

worksheet on the next page).

YES NO My company has an office to transact business in Iowa.

YES NO My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mail.

YES NO My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project.

YES NO My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a subsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder in Iowa.

If you answered "Yes" for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form.

If you answered "No" to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form.

To be completed by resident bidders Part B

My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses:

Dates: _____/_____/_____ to _____/_____/_____ Address:

City, State, Zip:

Dates: _____/_____/_____ to _____/_____/_____ Address:

City, State, Zip:

Dates: _____/_____/_____ to _____/_____/_____ Address:

City, State, Zip:

You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed.


Project # 4181220

BIDDER STATUS FORM 00 4100.01-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C

1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State:

2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to bidders who are residents? (Circle one) YES NO

3. If you answered "Yes" to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation.

You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed.

To be completed by all bidders Part D

I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowledge and I know that my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may be a reason to reject my bid.

Firm name:

Signature: Date:

You must submit the completed form to the government body requesting bids per 875 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 156. This form has been approved by the Iowa Labor Commissioner.

END OF SECTION


AUTHORIZATION TO

TRANSACT BUSINESS WORKSHEET


00 4100.02-1

SECTION 00 4100.02

AUTHORIZATION TO TRANSACT BUSINESS WORKSHEET

This worksheet may be used to help complete Part A of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. Circle Yes or No.

YES NO My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor.

YES NO My business is sole proprietorship & I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes.

YES NO My business is a general partnership or joint venture. More than 50 percent of the general partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes.

YES NO My business is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State & has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report, & has not filed articles of dissolution.

YES NO My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa, the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, has filed its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, & has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked.

YES NO My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this state & the statement has not been canceled.

YES NO My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa & a statement of cancellation has not been filed.

YES NO My business is a limited partnership or limited liability partnership which has filed a certificate of limited partnership in this state, & has not filed a statement of termination.

YES NO My business is a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved & no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership.

YES NO My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa & has not filed a statement of termination.

YES NO My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa & the certificate has not been revoked or canceled.


Project # 4181220

AUTHORIZATION TO TRANSACT BUSINESS WORKSHEET

00 4100.02-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT


00 4100.03-1

SECTION 00 4100.03

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER OR AGENT, BEING DULY SWORN ON OATH, SAYS THAT HE/SHE HAS NOT, NOR HAS ANY OTHER MEMBER, REPRESENTATIVE, OR AGENT OF THE FIRM, COMPANY, CORPORATION OR PARTNERSHIP REPRESENTED BY HIM, ENTERED INTO ANY COMBINATION, COLLUSION OR AGREEMENT WITH ANY PERSON RELATIVE TO THE PRICE TO BE BID BY ANYONE AT SUCH LETTING NOR TO PREVENT ANY PERSON FROM BIDDING NOR TO INCLUDE ANYONE TO REFRAIN FROM BIDDING, AND THAT THIS BID IS MADE WITHOUT REFERENCE TO ANY OTHER BID AND WITHOUT ANY AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDING OR COMBINATION WITH ANY OTHER PERSON IN REFERENCE TO SUCH BIDDING.

HE/SHE FURTHER SAYS THAT NO PERSON OR PERSONS, FIRMS, OR CORPORATION HAS, HAVE OR WILL RECEIVE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, ANY REBATE, FEE GIFT, COMMISSION OR THING OF VALUE ON ACCOUNT OF SUCH SALE.

OATH AND AFFIRMATION

I HEREBY AFFIRM UNDER THE PENALTIES FOR PERJURY THAT THE FACTS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THE FOREGOING BID FOR PUBLIC WORKS ARE TRUE AND CORRECT.

DATED THIS _______ DAY OF _____________________________, ___________________.

NAME OF ORGANIZATION: _____________________________________________________

TITLE OF PERSON SIGNING: _____________________________________________________

SIGNATURE: _______________________________________________________________

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

STATE OF __________________________________)

COUNTY OF ________________________________)

BEFORE ME, A NOTARY PUBLIC, PERSONALLY APPEARED THE ABOVE NAMED AND SWORE THAT THE STATEMENTS CONTAINED IN THE FOREGOING DOCUMENT ARE TRUE AND CORRECT.

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO ME THIS _______ DAY OF _____________________________,

NOTARY PUBLIC SIGNATURE: ______________________________________________

MY COMMISSION EXPIRES: ______________________________________________

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 00 4100.03-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


SCHEDULE OF BID PRICES


00 4201-1

SECTION 00 4201

SCHEDULE OF BID PRICES


LEGAL NAME OF BIDDER:___________________________________________________________

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:_______________________________________________________________

The project consists of Base Bid.

TOTAL BASE BID:__________________________________________________________________

($_________________) (use words)

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220

SCHEDULE OF BID PRICES 00 4201-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


CONTRACTING FORMS AND

SUPPLEMENTS


00 5000-1

SECTION 00 5000

CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WHERE IT IS PROVIDED IN THE BID DOCUMENTS THAT THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE AIA DOCUMENTS, THEY ARE HEREBY MADE A PART OF THESE DOCUMENTS TO THE SAME EXTENT AS IF BOUND HEREIN. AIA FORMS MAY BE PURCHASED FROM THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AT WWW.AIA.ORG.

1.2 AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

A. See Section 00 5200 - Agreement Form for the Agreement form to be executed.

B. See Section 00 7200 - General Conditions for the General Conditions.

C. See Section 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions for the Supplementary Conditions.

D. The Agreement is based on AIA A101.

E. The General Conditions are based on AIA A201.

1.3 FORMS

A. Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. Bond Forms:

1. Bid Bond Form: AIA A310.

2. Performance and Payment Bond Form: AIA A312.

C. Post-Award Certificates and Other Forms:

1. Schedule of Values Form: AIA G703.

2. Application for Payment Form: AIA G702 and G703.

D. Clarification and Modification Forms:

1. Request for Interpretation/Information Form: Contractor-created form (PDF).

2. Architect's Supplemental Instruction Form: Architect-created form (PDF).

3. Construction Change Directive Form: AIA G714.

4. Request for Proposal Form (Proposal Request): Architect-created form (PDF).

5. Change Order Request Form: Contractor-created form (PDF).

6. Change Order Form: AIA G701.

E. Closeout Forms:

1. Certificate of Substantial Completion Form: AIA G704.

2. Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims Form: AIA G706.

http://www.aia.org/contractdocs

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/


Project # 4181220

CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS

00 5000-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3. Affidavit of Release of Liens Form: AIA G706A.

4. Consent of Surety to Final Payment Form: AIA G707.


A. AIA A101 - Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum; 2007.

B. AIA A201 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction; 2007.

C. AIA A310 - Bid Bond; 2010.

D. AIA A312 - Performance Bond and Payment Bond; 2010.

E. AIA G701 - Change Order; 2001.

F. AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment; 1992.

G. AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet; 1992.

H. AIA G704 - Certificate of Substantial Completion; 2000.

I. AIA G714 - Construction Change Directive; 2007.



END OF SECTION

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/

http://www.aia.org/


AGREEMENT FORM


00 5200-1

SECTION 00 5200

AGREEMENT FORM

FORM OF AGREEMENT

AIA Document A101 - 2017 "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor", where the basis of payment is a stipulated Sum, forms the basis of the contract between the Owner and Contractor and is hereby made a part of these Documents to the same extent as if bound herein. All provisions which are not amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows:

AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100 Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone: 515-244-7502 Fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org

END OF AGREEMENT FORM



Project # 4181220

AGREEMENT FORM 00 5200-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

FORM


00 6325-1

SECTION 00 6325

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

TO: __________________________________________________________________________


OWNER: METRO WASTE AUTHORITY

BID DATE: __________________________________________________________________________

We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project:

DRAWING NO.: ____________ DRAWING NAME: ___________________________________

SPEC SECT. SPEC NAME PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM ___________ ___________ ___________ ______________

Proposed Substitution: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation.

Submit, with request, all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance.

CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUAL PERFORMANCE

The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item.

SUBMITTED BY:

Signature: _________________________________ Title: ____________________________________

Firm: ____________________________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________________________

Telephone:________________________________ Date:___________________________

Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind the firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval.

FOR USE BY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER:

__ Accepted __ Accepted as Noted __ Not Accepted __ Received Too Late

Date: ____________________________________________________________________


Project # 4181220

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 6325-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

FILL IN BLANKS BELOW

A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes No

B. If Yes, clearly indicate changes: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

C. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? Yes No

D. If No, fully explain: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

E. What effect does substitution have on other Contracts or other trades? _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

F. What effect does substitution have on construction schedule? _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

G. Manufacturer’s warranties of the proposed and specified items are: _______________ Same ______________Different (Explain on Attachment)

H. Reason for Request: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

I. Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution. List significant variations: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

J. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

K. Designation of maintenance services and sources: _________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________

(ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF REQUIRED)

END OF SECTION


GENERAL CONDITIONS


00 7200-1

SECTION 00 7200

GENERAL CONDITIONS

FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS

AIA Document A201- 2017 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" is the General Conditions between the Owner and the Contractor and is hereby made a part of these documents to the same extent as if bound herein. The document can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects state office as follows:

AIA Iowa 400 Locust Street, Suite 100

Des Moines, IA 50309 Phone: 515-244-7502

Fax: 515-244-5347 www.aiaiowa.org

END OF SECTION



Project # 4181220

GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 7200-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


SUPPLEMENTARY

CONDITIONS


00 7300-1

SECTION 00 7300

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

The following Supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A201 - 2017. Where any Article, Section, Section or clause or portion thereof of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of that Article, Section, Section or clause or portion thereof shall remain in effect.

ARTICLE 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS

No Supplements

ARTICLE 2: OWNER

2.1 GENERAL

Add the following Clause 2.1.1.1 to Section 2.1.1:

2.1.1.1 The Owner is:

Name: Metro Waste Authority Address: 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100



2.1.1.2 The Owner's Authorized contract Representative is:

Name: Yuta Naganuma, P.E. Title: Project Manager Address: 300 East Locust Street, Suite 100

Des Moines, IA 50309 Telephone: 515.333.4446 Email: [email protected]

2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER

Delete Section 2.2.3 and substitute the following Section 2.2.3:

2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project and a legal description of the site. The furnishing of this information does not make the Owner responsible for the accuracy of the information and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to satisfy himself relative to the accuracy and completeness of such information. The Contractor shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the work.


2.2.5 The Owner will furnish the Contractor three (3) copies of the Contract Documents for use in execution of the work. The Contractor may purchase additional copies at the cost of reproduction, postage, and handling.

mailto:[email protected]


Project # 4181220

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

00 7300 - 2

ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR

3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR

Add the following sentence to the end of 3.2.2:

3.2.2 The Contractor also represents that all Contract Documents for the Project have been examined, including those intended for work of trades not normally performed by the Contractor's own forces, and that it has become thoroughly familiar with all conditions which may pertain to or affect the Work under the Contract.

Add the following Section 3.2.5 to Section 3.2:

3.2.5 The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for evaluating and responding to the Contractor’s Requests For Information (RFI) that are not prepared in accordance with the Contract Documents or where the requested information is available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation.

3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

Add the following Sections 3.3.4 and 3.3.5:

3.3.4 The Owner reserves the right to retain ownership to any materials or equipment that is part of the existing facility. If material or equipment is to be removed from the site, the Contractor shall detach such items and before removing from site, obtain permission from the Owner, or his designee, to do so. All items not retained by Owner shall be removed in a proper manner by the Contractor.

3.3.5 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner before construction begins one copy of Material Safety Data Sheets of hazardous substances to be stored on the Owner’s premises or incorporated in the performance of this contract. The Contractor shall also keep Material Safety Data Sheets posted at the work site for all substances while these substances are on the Owner’s premises. Hazardous substances shall be any substance which is covered by Law (Right to Know Rules).

3.6 TAXES

Delete the language in Section 3.6 and substitute the following Sections:

3.6.2 The Owner as a designated exempt entity will complete an online application to register this Project with the Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance. The Owner will distribute Tax Exemption Certificates and Authorization Letters to the Contractor and all Subcontractors who have been identified at, or before filing of the Performance Bond.

3.6.3 On or before the time the Performance Bond is filed, the Contractor shall provide a listing to the Owner identifying all Subcontractors. Contractor and Subcontractors shall make copies of the Tax Exemption Certificate and provide a copy to each supplier providing construction material. This Certificate will allow the Contractor and Subcontractors to purchase qualified building materials free from sales tax for the Project. The Tax Exemption Certificate and Authorization Letter have been developed exclusively for this purpose and are applicable only for this specific Project.

3.6.4 If the online registration is not available at the time The Contract is approved by the Owner, the Owner will notify the Contractor, in writing, and the cost of sales tax on all construction materials used for the Project will be added to the Contract Sum. The Contractor shall then submit Form 35-002 to the Owner for Iowa sales/use tax paid.


Project # 4181220



00 7300-3

3.6.5 Payment will be made in accordance with the payment provisions set out in these specifications and the Advertisement for Bids and Notice of Public Hearing. Notwithstanding anything in these specifications and the Advertisement for Bides and Notice of Public Hearing to the contrary, no Final Payment shall be released until Form 35-002 has been filed with the Owner, where applicable, and all lien waivers are on file.

3.6.6 Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Contractor shall file with Owner forms contemplated by the Iowa Code enabling Owner to apply for a refund for any sales or use tax paid in carrying out the work.

3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS


3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor knowingly encounters and recognizes human remains, burial markers, archeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains and features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence or good faith belief of such existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

Add Clauses 3.7.5.1 through 3.7.5.3 to Section 3.7.5:

3.7.5.1 Upon securing building permits, any plan reviews and fees which may be required by the State or Local Jurisdiction Having Authority in which the project resides, such as Fire Alarm and Automatic Sprinkler System, shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.7.5.2 The Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections related to the performance of its Work and ensuring Work is complete for inspections. The Contractor is responsible for any costs associated with re-inspection caused by Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In addition, the Contractor is responsible for costs associated with Architectural/Engineering services related to evaluation of the deficiencies and development of an acceptable solution.

3.7.5.3 The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect/Engineer or Architect/Engineer's Consultants for services related to evaluation of the deficiencies and development of an acceptable solution, including agreed-upon changes in the Contract Documents.

Add the following Section 3.7.6 and associated clauses 3.7.6.1 thru 3.7.6.3:

3.7.6 The State of Iowa, its agencies, and its political subdivisions, including cities, school districts and public utilities are required by Iowa Code Section 73A.21 to require a reciprocal resident bidder and resident labor force preference.

3.7.6.1 A “Resident Bidder” means a person or entity authorized to transact business in the State of Iowa and having a place of business for transacting business within the state at which it is conducting and has conducted business for at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement for the public improvement. If another state or foreign country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the more stringent definition is applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country.


Project # 4181220


00 7300 - 4

3.7.6.2 A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country other than Iowa if that state our foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state of foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state of foreign county. The preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident.

3.7.6.3 If the Contractor is a nonresident bidder, the Contractor is required to specify in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor whether any preference (as described in 3.7.6.2) is in effect in the nonresident bidder’s state or country at the time of this bid and identify the source of the regulation.

3.9 SUPERINTENDENT


3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site whenever two or more subcontractors are performing the Work. The superintendent’s absence from the project site when work is being performed does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for correctly performing the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Delete the last sentence of Section 3.10.2 so that the Section now reads:

3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.

3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

Add the following Section 3.12.11:

3.12.11 The Architect's and its Consultants' review of Contractor's submittals will be limited to examination of an initial submittal and one (1) re-submittal. The Architect's review of additional submittals will be made only with the consent of the Owner after written notification to the Contractor and Owner by the Architect. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of such additional re-submittals.

3.13 USE OF SITE

Add the following Sections 3.13.1 and 3.13.2:

3.13.1 Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of inconvenience to and interruption of the Owner's operations. Any and all interruptions of the operations of the Owner necessary for the performance of the Work shall be noted in the Progress Schedule and the Contractor shall additionally give the Owner sufficient advanced written notice of such interruption as to allow the Owner to adjust operations accordingly. Contractor's failure to give the Owner timely written notice of such intentions shall place the responsibility of any resulting delays or additional costs solely with the Contractor.


Project # 4181220



00 7300-5

3.13.2 The Contractor, any subcontractor, supplier, vendor or anyone else for whom the Contractor is responsible, shall not bring on the site any asbestos, PCB's, petroleum, hazardous waste or radioactive materials, except for proper use in performing the Work.

ARTICLE 4: ARCHITECT

4.1 GENERAL


4.1.1 The "Architect" is defined in this Contract as the Engineer or Architect lawfully licensed by the State to practice architecture or engineering or an entity licensed by the State to lawfully practice architecture or engineering identified as such in this Contract and as is referred to throughout the Contract documents as if singular in number. The term "Engineer," "Architect/Engineer," "Engineer/Architect," "Architect’s authorized representative," "Engineer’s authorized representative," or “Architect/Engineer’s authorized representative" shall mean "Architect" as defined in this Section.

Add the following Clause:

4.1.1.1 The Architect/Engineer is:

Name: Shive-Hattery, Inc. Address: 4125 Westown Parkway, Suite 100 Phone: 515.223.8104 Fax: 515.223.0622 Project Contact Person: Michael Anthony, P.E. Contact Person Email: [email protected]

4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

Add Clause 4.2.2.1 to Section 4.2.2:

4.2.2.1 The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid the Architect for site visits made necessary by the fault of the Contractor or by defects and deficiencies in the Work. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for such site visits.

Add to paragraph 4.2.13 the following sentence:

4.2.13 The term aesthetic effect includes, but is not limited to color, texture, profile, and relationship of masses.

ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK

Delete Section 5.2.1 and substitute with the following Section 5.2.1:

5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, within seven (7) calendar days after award of the contract and prior to execution of the contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will reply within seven (7) calendar days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity, or (2) to state that the Architect requires additional time and/or


Project # 4181220


00 7300 - 6

information to complete the review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within this time period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objections.

ARTICLE 6: CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

No Supplements

ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.2 CHANGE ORDERS


7.2.2 The forms used to process a Change Order will include AIA Document G701, Change Order.

ARTICLE 8: TIME

8.1 DEFINITIONS


8.1.4 The term "Day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean working day, excluding weekends and legal holidays.

8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION

8.2.2 Delete the word "knowingly" in the first sentence.

8.2.3 Insert after "Substantial Completion" the following:

8.2.3 "...and Final Completion within the Contract Times specified."

ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

9.3.1 At least 30 (thirty) days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers. If the Contract Documents require the Owner to retain a portion of the payments until some future time, the Applications for Payment shall clearly state the percentage and the amount to be retained.

Add the following sentence to Section 9.3.1:

9.3.1 The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized current edition of AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by current edition of AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet.


9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay 95 percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments.


Project # 4181220



00 7300-7

9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS


9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment and the Owner has approved the Application for Payment the Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the contract Documents and in accordance with Iowa Code Chapters 26 and 573, latest edition.

Delete the first two sentences of Section 9.6.4 so that it reads as follows:

9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law.

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION


9.8.3.1 The Architect will perform no more than one (1) inspection to determine whether the Work or a designated portion thereof has attained Substantial Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for the amounts paid to the Architect for any additional inspections.

9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT


9.10.6 Final payment will be made no less than thirty (30) days after the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner subject to the provisions of Sections 9.10.1 through 9.10.5. The following documents shall be completed by the contract completion date listed on the Form of Agreement and shall be received prior to making final payment:

2) Certificate of Occupancy

3) Affidavits

4) Warranties

5) Lien Waivers

6) Record Drawings

Add the following Section 9.10.7 and Clauses 9.10.7.1 thru 9.10.7.4:

9.10.7 The following clauses are in accordance with Iowa Code, Chapter 26, Section 26.13, Early Release of Retainage, and are reiterated here for reference. Other provisions of Chapter 26, Chapter 573, and other applicable Chapters of the Code also apply:

9.10.7.1 At any time after all work on the project is substantially completed, the Contractor may request the release of all or part of the retained funds owed. The request shall be accompanied by a sworn statement of the Contractor that, ten (10) calendar days prior to filing the request, notice was given as required by Section 7 (of Chapter 26) to all known subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers.


Project # 4181220


00 7300 - 8

9.10.7.2 Except as provided under Section 3 (of Chapter 26), upon receipt of such request, the Owner shall release all or part of the retained funds. Retained funds that are approved as payable shall be paid at the time of the next monthly payment or within 30 days, whichever is sooner. If partial retained funds are released pursuant to a Contractor’s request, no retained funds shall be subsequently held based on that portion of the work. If within 30 days of when payment becomes due the Owner does not release the retained funds due, interest shall accrue on the amount of retained funds at the rate of interest that is calculated as the prime rate plus one percent per year as of the day interest begins to accrue until the amount is paid.

9.10.7.3 If labor and/or materials are yet to be provided at the time the request for the release of the retained funds is made, an amount equal to 200% of the value of the labor and/or materials yet to be provided, as determined by the Owner, may be withheld until such labor and/or materials are provided.

9.10.7.4 An itemization of the labor and/or materials yet to be provided, or the reason that the request of retained funds is denied, shall be provided to the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the receipt for release of retained funds.

ARTICLE 10: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY


10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. This requirement also includes compliance with Iowa’s Smoke Free Air Act and Iowa’s Sex Offender law which no longer allows registered sex offenders to be on school property without the school’s permission. Refer to the Acknowledgment and Certification document 00 7300.01 that all Contractors, Subcontractors, and Vendors must sign.


10.2.4 When use, handling, and/or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods is necessary for execution of the work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice and shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel.

10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS


10.3.7 The Owner’s existing facility where the Project is being constructed is known to contain asbestos and lead. The location of such materials is on file with the Owner. The Contractor shall not remove or disturb any asbestos or lead materials unless licensed to do so in the State where this Project is located. If asbestos or lead must be removed and such removal is not already a part of this Contract, contact the Owner who will arrange for the proper removal of such materials by others if it is mutually agreed the materials need to be removed.


Project # 4181220



00 7300-9

ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE AND BONDS

11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

Add the following Clauses 11.1.2.1 through 11.1.2.4 to Section 11.1.2:

11.1.2.1 Worker’s Compensation Insurance and Employer’s Liability insurance shall be carried by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the statutes of the State or States in which the work will be performed plus Federal Laws.

11.1.2.2 The limits for Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage for Premises-Operations, Independent Contractors’ Protective, Products-Completed Operations, Contractual Liability, Personal Injury and Broad Form Property Damage (including coverage for Explosion, Collapse and Underground hazards) shall be as follows:

$2,000,000 general aggregate

$2,000,000 products/completed operations aggregate (Maintain for two (2) years after final payment.)

$1,000,000 personal and advertising injury

$1,000,000 each occurrence personal injury

$250,000 for damage to premises rented to Contractor

$10,000 on medical expenses on any one person

.1 The policy shall be endorsed to have the General Aggregate apply on a per project basis.

.2 The policy shall be written on an occurrence form of coverage.

.3 The policy shall include coverage for the hazards of underground explosion and collapse.

11.1.2.3 Business automobile liability including hired and non-owned automobile liability with limits not less than:

$1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property damage

11.1.2.4 Excess/umbrella liability coverage shall be provided with limits of:

$1,000,000 each occurrence

$1,000,000 general aggregate

Delete Section 11.1.3 and replace it with the following Section 11.1.3:

11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall provide written notification to the Contractor of the cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by Section 11.3 The Owner shall provide such written notice within five (5) business days of the date the Owner is first aware of the cancelation or expiration, or is first aware that the cancelation or expiration is threatened or otherwise may occur, whichever comes first.


Project # 4181220


00 7300 - 10


11.1.3.1 If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be on an ACORD form, completed and supplemented in accordance with AIA Document G715, Instruction Sheet and Supplemental Attachment for an ACORD Certificate of Insurance form.

Delete Section 11.1.4 and replace it with the following Section 11.1.4:

11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage and excess umbrella liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include 1) the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees as additional insureds for the claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during Contractor’s operations and 2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during Contractor’s completed operations. The commercial liability coverage shall be primary and non-contributory for benefit of additional insureds and provide for severability of interest for additional insureds.


11.1.5 All insurance coverages provided by the Contractor under Section 11 shall provide for a waiver of subrogation to the Owner, Architect and Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees.

Add the following Section 11.1.6 and Clauses 11.1.6.1 thru 11.1.6.4:

11.1.6 All liability policies which include the Owner as an additional insured shall include a Governmental Immunities Endorsement, pursuant to Chapter 670.4 of the Iowa Code, which endorsement shall include the following provisions:

11.1.6.1 Non-waiver of Government Immunity: The insurance carrier expressly agrees and states that the purchase of this policy and including the Owner as an Additional Insured does not waive any of the defenses of governmental immunity available to the Owner under Iowa Code Section 670.4 as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time.

11.1.6.2 Claims Coverage: The insurance carrier further agrees that this policy of insurance shall cover only those claims not subject to the defenses of governmental immunity under Iowa Code Section 670.4 as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time.

11.1.6.3 Assertion of Government Liability: The Owner shall be responsible for asserting any defense of governmental immunity, and may do so at any time and shall do so upon the timely written request of the insurance carrier.

11.1.6.4 Non-Denial of Coverage: The insurance carrier shall not deny coverage or deny any of the rights and benefits accruing to the Owner under this policy for reasons of governmental immunity unless and until a court of competent jurisdiction has ruled in favor of the defense(s) of governmental immunity asserted by the Owner.

11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE

Delete Clause 11.3.1.4 and substitute the following Clause:

11.3.1.4 The Contractor shall at the Contractor’s own expense provide insurance coverage for materials stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also for portions of the Work in transit until such materials are permanently attached to the Work.


Project # 4181220



00 7300-11


11.3.1.6 The insurance required by Section 11.3 is not intended to cover machinery, tools or equipment owned or rented by the Contractor which are utilized in the performance of the Work but not incorporated into the permanent improvements. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s own expense, provide insurance coverage for owned or rented machinery, tools or equipment which shall be subject to the provisions of Section 11.3.7.

Delete Section 11.3.6 and substitute the following Section:

11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Contractor shall file with the Owner a certified copy of each policy that includes insurance coverage required by this Section 11.3 as modified by these SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. The Owner shall provide written notification to the Contractor of the cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by Section 11.3. The Owner shall provide such written notice within five (5) business days of the date the Owner is first aware of the cancellation or expiration, or is first aware that the cancellation or expiration is threatened or otherwise may occur, whichever comes first.

11.4 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

Delete Section 11.4.1 and substitute the following Section and Clauses:

11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be obtained through the Contractor’s usual source and the cost shall be included in the Contract sum. The amount of each bond shall be equivalent to 100 percent of the Contract Sum.

11.4.1.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three (3) days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished.

11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

ARTICLE 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK


12.2.2.4 Upon request by the Owner and prior to the expiration of one year from the date of Substantial Completion, the Architect will conduct and the Contractor shall attend a meeting with the Owner to review the facility operations and performance.

ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.1 GOVERNING LAW

Delete the language in Section 13.1 and substitute the following language:

13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located.


Project # 4181220


00 7300 - 12

13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

Testing to be paid by the Owner.

13.6 INTEREST

Delete Section 13.6.and substitute the following Section 13.6:

13.6 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date the payment is due and shall bear interest at the rate established by Section 74A.2 and 573.12, Code of Iowa, latest revision.

13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS

Delete Section 13.7 in its entirety and substitute the following Section 13.7.1 and Clauses 13.7.1.1 thru 13.7.1.3:

13.7.1 As between the Owner and the Contractor, the commencement of the statutory limitation period shall be as follows:

13.7.1.1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion.

13.7.1.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment.

13.7.1.3 After Final Certificate of Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Section 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last.

13.8 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY

Add the following subparagraphs to 13.8:

13.8.1 The Contractor shall conform in all respects with the provisions of the Federal Civil Rights Act, the Code of Iowa, Chapter 216 Civil Rights Commission and the rules and regulations adopted thereto by the Iowa Civil Rights Commission. The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, ancestry, age, marital status, physical or mental handicap. The Contractor shall require similar clauses in all of its subcontracts for service or materials.


Project # 4181220



00 7300-13

ADD THE FOLLOWING SECTION 13.11 TO ARTICLE 13:

13.11 SMOKING

Add the following subparagraph to 13.11:

13.11.1 Smoking is not allowed on the Owner’s premises which includes personal or company vehicles parked on the Owner’s property.

ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

No Supplements

ARTICLE 15: CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

Add Clauses 15.1.5.3 and 15.1.5.4 to Section 15.1.5:

15.1.5.3 Claims for increase in the Contract Time shall set forth in detail the circumstances that form the basis for the Claim, the date upon which each cause of delay began to affect the progress of the Work, the date upon which each cause of delay ceased to affect the progress of the Work and the number of days’ increase in the Contract Time claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay. The Contractor shall provide such supporting documentation as the Owner may require including, where appropriate, a revised construction schedule indicating all the activities affected by the circumstances forming the basis of the Claim.

15.1.5.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to a separate increase in the Contract Time for each one of the number of causes of delay which may have concurrent or interrelated effects on the progress of the Work, or for concurrent delays due to the fault of the Contractor.

15.2 INITIAL DECISION MAKER

Delete last sentence of Section 15.2.5 and substitute the following:

15.2.5 "If the parties do not mutually agree with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker, then resolution shall be subject to litigation, unless an alternative dispute resolution process such as mediation or arbitration is mutually agreeable to by the parties involved in the dispute."

Delete Section 15.2.6.

Delete Sections 15.3 and 15.4 in their entirety.



END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


00 7300 - 14


SUMMARY


01 1000-1

SECTION 01 1000

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT

A. Project Name: MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

B. Architect's Name: Shive-Hattery, Inc.

C. The Project consists of coordination with the pre-engineered metal building fabricator including equipment platforms and catwalks. Work must commence on or about August 20, 2018 and be substantially complete by September 20, 2018. The Transfer Station will be shut down to truck traffic during this time. All concrete work needs to occur between August 20, 2018 and September 20, 2018. After September 20, 2018, contractor may work outside of operating hours to complete work.

1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION

A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form.

1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE

A. The project schedule is defined in the Advertisement for Bids.

1.4 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.

C. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.

D. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:

1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.


Project # 4181220

SUMMARY 01 1000-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking garage, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, or emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Time Restrictions: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated.

D. Utility Outages and Shutdown:

1. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

2. Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied.

3. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities.

4. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.


Project # 4181220

SUMMARY Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 01 1000-3

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220

SUMMARY 01 1000-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


PRICE AND PAYMENT

PROCEDURES


01 2000-1

SECTION 01 2000

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.

B. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 00 5000 - Contracting Forms and Supplements: Forms to be used.

B. Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form: Contract Sum, retainages, payment period, monetary values of unit prices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

B. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

1. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.

2. Submittals Schedule.

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

C. Form to be used: AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets

D. Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

2. Revise list below to suit Project.

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Architect's project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

E. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.


Project # 4181220


01 2000-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

F. Submit Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days after the pre-construction meeting.

G. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

1. Related Specification Section or Division.

2. Description of the Work.

3. Name of subcontractor.

4. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.

5. Name of supplier.

6. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.

7. Dollar value.

a. Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

H. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment.

I. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.

J. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

K. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

L. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

M. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

N. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

B. Form to be used: AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.

C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.


Project # 4181220



01 2000-3

D. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following:

1. Item Number.

2. Description of work.

3. Scheduled Values.

4. Previous Applications.

5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application.

6. Authorized Change Orders.

7. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application.

8. Percentage of Completion.

9. Balance to Finish.

10. Retainage.

E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.

F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products.

G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.

H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment.

I. Include the following with the application:

1. Transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01 3000. Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

a. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

2. Construction progress schedule, revised and current.

3. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors.

a. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1) Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2) When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.

3) Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.


Project # 4181220


01 2000-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

4) Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

b. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1) Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2) When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.

3) Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4) Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5) Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

J. When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description.

K. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Products list.

5. Schedule of unit prices.

6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).

7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.

9. Copies of building permits.

10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work.

11. Initial progress report.

12. Report of preconstruction conference.

13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

14. Performance and payment bonds.

15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.


Project # 4181220



01 2000-5

L. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion

1. In order for substantial completion to be issued, the additional following requirements shall be met:

a. O&M and warranty manuals submitted, reviewed, completed, and turned over to the owner (hard and digital copies).

b. As-built drawings submitted.

c. Testing and balancing report submitted to engineer.

d. Owner training shall have been completed.

2. After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

a. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

b. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

M. Final Payment Application

1. Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

a. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

b. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

c. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

d. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

e. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

f. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."

g. Evidence that claims have been settled.

h. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

i. Change of door locks to Owner's access.

1.6 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT

A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished:

1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000.


Project # 4181220


01 2000-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018



END OF SECTION


CONTRACT MODIFICATION

PROCEDURES


01 2600-1

SECTION 01 2600

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Minor Changes in the Work

B. Proposal Requests

C. Change Order Procedures

D. Construction Change Directive

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on a Software Generated "Architect's Supplemental Instruction".

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.


Project # 4181220


01 2600-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use Software-Generated Proposal Request.

D. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect/Engineer.

E. Unit Price Change Order: For predetermined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not predetermined, execute Work under a Construction Change Directive. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.

F. Construction Change Directive: Architect/Engineer may issue a directive, on AIA Form G714 Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change.

G. Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. Architect/Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.

H. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.

I. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order.

J. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.


Project # 4181220



01 2600-3

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


01 2600-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


01 3000-1

SECTION 01 3000


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Preconstruction meeting.

B. Progress meetings.

C. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.

D. Submittal procedures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation, information, or clarification of the Contract Documents.

B. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that does require Architect's responsive action.

C. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

C. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.


Project # 4181220


01 3000-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

C. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

D. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIS)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a Request for Information (RFI) in the form specified, with a necessary question regarding ambiguities or conflicts in the documents or field conditions, concealed conditions at the site, clarification of a contract requirement, dimensions, or other information for which clarification is required.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor, Architect, or Owner. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor, Architect, or Owner will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

3. The Contractor is required to review all RFI's submitted by subcontractor's and suppliers for completeness, accuracy, validity, and justification prior to submission to the Architect. The Contractor can commonly answer subcontractor /supplier RFI's without delegation to the Architect.

4. Promptly submit any RFI's that could result in a delay of the activities on the critical path if the resolution is not obtained promptly. Provide a date on each RFI that the response is required by, in order to not have an impact on the critical path of construction activities.

5. In the case of a condition that requires a change in the work to resolve a conflict or other condition, the Contractor shall include a recommendation for resolution of the condition and submit a separate Change Order Request (COR).

6. The Architect's response to an RFI is not an authorization to proceed with work involving additional cost, time or both. If the response involves additional work the Contractor shall provide the Architect with a complete description of work added and work deleted by the response within seven (7) days of the issued date of the RFI response. If the response involves additional work for which the Contractor will seek an adjustment to the contract sum, time or both, the Contractor shall submit a cost proposal in the form of a Change Order Request (COR) to the Architect. The Contractor shall not proceed with incorporating the response into the work until a Change Order or, Construction Change Directive has been fully executed.

7. Unless notified otherwise by the Contractor, the Architect's RFI response shall have the same effect as the Architect's order for minor changes in the Work. The Contractor will proceed with the Work, and the response will be incorporated into the contract that same as the Architect's written order for minor changes in the Work. Notify the Architect in writing if noted modifications cannot be made due to conflicting circumstances in the field, in other contract documents, or for other reasons.


Project # 4181220



01 3000-3

8. The Contractor shall not incorporate any language into RFI’s or Change Proposals that imply future additional costs or delays beyond those fully explained within the document. The Contractor may stipulate conditions or constraints under which the pricing or time may change; however, such conditions or constraints shall not infringe on the Architect’s or Owner’s right to adequate time for review of the issue.

9. The Contractor shall not submit Confirming RFI's, i.e., RFI's requesting confirmation of information already in the contract documents or previously provided, or requesting confirmation to questions previously answered or clarification previously given. Similarly the Contractor shall not submit Repetitive RFI's, i.e., RFI's, wherein the same information is requested more than once, even if phrased in another format or asked in a different manner. Confirming& Repetitive RFI's are considered frivolous.

10. The Contractor shall not retain or suppress RFI's for group submissions. Each individual RFI is to be submitted expeditiously upon occurrence. Numerous RFI's submitted in a short time period will not be considered reasonable, and will result in review times being extended accordingly.

11. The Contractor shall not install any components in locations other than as indicated on the contract documents unless 1) all other affected work has been reviewed and coordinated with the relocation; and 2) the relocation is the resolution for an RFI, including a statement by the Contractor that the relocation has been coordinated with other affected work.

12. The Contractor shall not use an RFI as a means of proposing a deviation, an alternative product, arrangement, or installation for the Contractor's convenience; these proposals shall be submitted as Substitution Requests, and the RFI voided. A contractor-proposed alternative arrangement or installation submitted as an RFI will not become the subsequent basis for a claim by the contractor.

13. The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for evaluating and responding to:

a. Incomplete, illegitimate, or frivolous Contractor's requests for information and requests for information that are not prepared in accordance with the Contract Documents.

b. Contractor requests for information where the requested information is available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the contract documents, field conditions, contractor-prepared coordination drawings, other Owner/Architect-provided information or prior project correspondence or documentation.

c. Contractor-proposed alternative arrangements or installations for the convenience of the contractor which, upon acceptance, requires the Architect to revise the contract documents.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

2. Contractor's signature.


Project # 4181220


01 3000-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing information or interpretation. Each RFI shall include sufficient detail for evaluation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow an average of fourteen (14) days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. Some issues may take longer for review, the recipient of the RFI shall notify the sender of the RFI if a significant delay will occur.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions or deviations.

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

f. Incomplete, inaccurate, invalid, and unjustified RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

g. Confirming or Repetitive RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit a Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If the Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within seven days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.


Project # 4181220



01 3000-5

1.6 ARCHITECT’S DIGITAL DATA FILES

A. General: The Architect can provide digital data files of the contract drawings to the Contractor for use in preparing submittals upon request.

1. The digital data files will be transmitted to the contractor via Newforma Info Exchange Server. By downloading these documents, the Contractor agrees to also accept the following terms and conditions:

a. Definitions: “S-H” shall mean Shive-Hattery, Inc., Shive-Hattery A/E Services, P.C., or Design Organization, a Division of Shive-Hattery, Inc. “Client” shall mean the person or entity that has executed an Agreement with S-H for services resulting in this electronic file. “Other Party” shall mean any person or entity other than S-H or Client.

b. Where these electronic files are provided under the terms and conditions of a contract and such contract terms and conditions conflict with these terms and conditions, then the contract terms and conditions shall prevail.

c. In the event these electronic files are provided as a project deliverable to a Client of S-H:

1) The electronic files are submitted to the Client for a 30-day Acceptance Period. During this period, the Client may review and examine these files; any errors detected during this time will be corrected by S-H as part of the basic agreement. Any changes requested after the Acceptance Period will be considered additional services to be performed on a time and material basis at S-H’s current standard fee schedule.

2) Because data stored on electronic media can deteriorate undetected or can be modified without S-H’s knowledge, the Client agrees that S-H will not be held liable for the completeness or correctness of the electronic media after an acceptance period of 30 days after delivery of the electronic files.

d. Any use or reuse of original or altered electronic files by the Client or Other Party without written verification, or CAD adaptation for the specific purpose intended by S-H, will be at the Client’s or Other Party’s risk and full legal responsibility. Furthermore, the Client or Other Party will, to the fullest extent permitted by the law, indemnify and hold S-H harmless from any and all claims, suits, liability, demands, or costs arising out of or resulting therefrom. Any verification of such adaptation by the Client will entitle S-H to additional compensation at S-H’s current standard fee schedule.

e. S-H makes no warranty as to the compatibility of these files with other hardware or software.

f. These electronic files were prepared by S-H and are instruments of S-H’s service for use solely with respect to this project and S-H shall be deemed the author of these documents and shall retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights, including the copyright.



Project # 4181220


01 3000-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NEWFORMA INFO EXCHANGE SERVER

A. Newforma Info Exchange server: The Architect will provide the Contractor access to this server to download and upload files via any internet-capable computer running Internet Explorer.

B. Benefits and features of Newforma Info Exchange for the Contractor include:

1. A collaborative submittal log is maintained within Newforma Info Exchange by the Architect and Contractor.

2. Submittal data files transmitted through Newforma Info Exchange bypass the file size limits of email systems.

3. Submittal data files transferred through Newforma Info Exchange are encrypted.

4. Notifications and reminders can be optionally scheduled and expiration dates for documents can be automatically set.

5. CD/DVD disc: The contractor is required to keep backup copies of any data submitted to the Architect in CD/DVD format. The Contractors transmittal letter identifying the project and contents of the disc must accompany the CD/DVD.

6. Exceptions: The following submittals are not to be done electronically.

a. Samples, color charts, original warranties, and notarized affidavits.

3.2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Contractor will be responsible for scheduling and running a preconstruction meeting.

B. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

C. Attendance Required Authorized Representatives of:

1. Owner.

2. Architect/Engineer and their subconsultants.

3. Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers, and other concerned parties.

D. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

E. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

1. Execution of Owner- Contractor Agreement.

2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.

3. Distribution of Contract Documents.

4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule.

5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, and Architect/Engineer, and their duties.


Project # 4181220



01 3000-7

6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.

7. Scheduling (tentative construction schedule and phasing).

8. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

9. Procedures for RFIs.

10. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

11. Work restrictions.

12. Owner's occupancy requirements.

13. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

14. Construction waste management and recycling.

15. Parking availability.

16. Office, work, and storage areas.

17. First aid.

18. Security.

19. Progress cleaning.

20. Working hours.

F. Contractor will record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants, with electronic copies to Architect/Engineer, Owner, Contractor participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Contractor shall schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.

C. Contractor will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.

D. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Job Superintendent and Major Subcontractors as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

E. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.

2. Review of Work progress.

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.


Project # 4181220


01 3000-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.

6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.

7. Maintenance of progress schedule.

8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.

9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.

10. Coordination of projected progress.

11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.

13. Access.

14. Site utilization.

15. Temporary facilities and controls.

16. Work hours.

17. Hazards and risks.

18. Progress cleaning.

19. Status of correction of deficient items.

20. Field observations.

21. RFIs.

22. Status of proposal requests.

23. Status of Change Orders.

24. Pending claims and disputes.

25. Documentation of information for payment requests.

26. Other business relating to Work.

F. Record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants, and those affected by decisions made.

G. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

3.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. Conduct Project coordination meetings where required by the individual sections and at weekly intervals as necessitated to maintain coordination and construction progress. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.


Project # 4181220



01 3000-9

B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.

3.5 PROJECT CLOSEOUT CONFERENCE

A. Contractor will schedule a project closeout conference at the project site prior to Owner occupancy.

B. Schedule the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to project closeout. Set a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than seven (7) days prior to the scheduled date of substantial completion.

3.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.

2. Shop drawings.

B. Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

3.7 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Documents: Submit one electronic copy in Adobe Portable Document Format PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected. Submit separate PDF files for each specification section. Multiple sections combined into one PDF file will be returned to the Contractor.

1. Name Files according to the following format: <Section Number> <Item Description>. For example: 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors Shop Drawings.

3.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Submittal System: The contractor will provide electronic submittals using Newforma Info Exchange Server or an Electronic Document Submittal Service.

B. Submittal Schedule:

1. The Contractor will prepare a submittal schedule.

2. In preparing the schedule, the Contractor should consider time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery plus include additional time required for making corrections or revision to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.


Project # 4181220


01 3000-10 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow fourteen (14) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals or consultants is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed requires extended review time for coordination.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “Furnish as Submitted” or “Furnish as Corrected” taken by Architect.

3.9 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Shop Drawings based on reproductions of the Contract Documents does not relieve the Contractor from evaluating specific project needs and identifying specific materials, dimensions, etc. on the Shop Drawings. Do not copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.

1. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

3.10 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Review each submittal for accuracy and completeness of dimensions and quantities, and for performance of equipment or systems. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. Submittals deemed by the Architect to not have been reviewed by the Contractor prior to submission may be returned and considered as "Not Submitted".

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents and coordinated with other Work of the contract.

3.11 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. Furnish as Submitted: Denotes that the submittal meets the criteria of the drawings and specifications and no revisions are required. The Contractor may proceed with fabrication or procurement of the item reviewed and may proceed with the work shown on the drawings and specifications for this item.


Project # 4181220



01 3000-11

2. Furnish as Corrected: Denotes that there are deficiencies, but the Contractor may proceed with fabrication or procurement of the item reviewed and may proceed with the work shown on the drawings and specifications for the item if the deficiencies are first corrected.

3. Revise and Resubmit: Denotes that the submittal does apply to the drawings and specifications, but insufficient detail has been shown or the submittal contains too many errors or omissions. The Contractor may NOT proceed with fabrication or procurement of the item reviewed and may NOT proceed with the work shown on the drawings and specifications for the item. The Contractor must revise the submittal and resubmit for review.

4. Incomplete - Resubmit: Denotes that some portion of the submittal is incomplete and the Architect cannot, therefore, review the submittal. The Architect will describe the incompleteness by comment on the submittal. The Contractor may NOT proceed with fabrication or procurement of the item reviewed and may NOT proceed with the work shown on the drawings and specifications for the item. The Contractor must revise the submittal and resubmit for review.

5. Rejected: Denotes that the submittal does not apply to the item specified or was not specified. The Contractor may NOT proceed with fabrication or procurement of the item reviewed and may NOT proceed with the work shown on the drawings and specifications for the item, and the Contractor must prepare a new submittal. The Architect will describe the reason for rejection by comment on the submittal.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

F. Architects review is only for limited purpose of checking for general conformance with the information given and design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

G. Unless notified otherwise by the Contractor, the Architect’s notations, comments, and mark-ups on approved submittals shall have the same effect as the Architect's order for minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the contract sum or extension in the contract time. The Contractor will proceed with the work, and the response will be incorporated into the contract the same as the Architect's written order for minor changes in the Work. Notify Architect in writing if noted modifications cannot be made due to conflicting circumstances in the field, in other contract documents, or for other reasons.

H. If the Contractor believes that the Architect’s notations, comments, or mark-ups constitute a change that results in added cost or time, the Contractor is to notify the Architect in writing within seven (7) days of receipt of the reviewed submittal. Do not proceed with changes that result in added cost or time until the matter is resolved in accordance with other provisions of the contract.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


01 3000-12 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


01 4000-1

SECTION 01 4000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. References and standards.

B. Quality assurance submittals.

C. Quality assurance.

D. References and standards.

E. Mock-ups.

F. Control of installation.

G. Tolerances.

H. Testing and inspection services.

I. Manufacturers' field services.

J. Defect Assessment.


A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.


A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).

B. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2014.

C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2013.

D. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a.

E. IAS AC89 - Accreditation Criteria for Testing Laboratories; 2010.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.


Project # 4181220

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

E. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

F. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

G. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections to be approved by architect/engineer: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Description of test and inspection.

3. Identification of applicable standards.

4. Identification of test and inspection methods.

5. Number of tests and inspections required.

6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect/Engineer and to Contractor.

1. Include:

a. Date issued.

b. Project title and number.


Project # 4181220

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 01 4000-3

c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

d. Name of inspector.

e. Date and time of sampling or inspection.

f. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

g. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.

h. Identification of product and specifications section.

i. Location in the Project.

j. Type of test/inspection.

k. Date of test/inspection.

l. Results of test/inspection.

m. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

n. Conformance with Contract Documents. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements.

o. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of results.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

E. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect/Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.

1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1.6 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

B. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

C. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.

D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

E. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect/Engineer shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

1.7 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.8 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES

A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing.

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

D. Contractor responsible for coordination with the hired testing agency.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01 Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

5. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 01 4000-5

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.

3.3 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

3.4 MOCK-UPS

A. Accepted mock-ups establish the standard of quality the Architect/Engineer will use to judge the Work.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer fifteen (15) working days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

C. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

D. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

E. Obtain Architect/Engineer's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

1. Architect/Engineer will issue written comments within seven (7) working days of initial review and each subsequent follow up review of each mockup.

2. Make corrections as necessary until Architect's approval is issued.

F. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.

G. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect/Engineer and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect/Engineer.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services.

3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.

4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

5. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products.

6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect/Engineer.

7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

D. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:

1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.

4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 01 4000-7

E. Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities.

3. Notify Architect/Engineer and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

3.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verify that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work.

3.8 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of Architect/Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect/Engineer will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

END OF SECTION

MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND

CONTROLS

Project # 4181220 Issued for BId 04-05-2018

01 5000-1

SECTION 01 5000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary utilities.

B. Temporary sanitary facilities.

C. Security requirements.

D. Waste removal facilities and services.

1.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Owner will provide the following:

1. Electrical power, consisting of connection to existing facilities.

2. Water supply, consisting of connection to existing facilities.

B. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.

1.3 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.

B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

C. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found.

1.4 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.5 SECURITY

A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

1.6 WASTE REMOVAL

A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition.

B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.


Project # 4181220

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 5000-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.



END OF SECTION


PRODUCT OPTIONS AND

SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS


01 6000-1

SECTION 01 6000

PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Procedures, requirements and limitations for considering substitutions.

2. Criteria for selecting product options and substitutions.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit requests for substitution in writing to Architect at least seven work days prior to bid date and hour. Requests received after this time will not be considered.

B. Clearly define and describe proposed substitute product including following items:

1. Fully completed Section 00 6325 Substitution Request Form.

2. Manufacturer's printed information supporting claim that proposed product meets specified requirements. Provide following as applicable:

a. Literature

b. Specifications

c. Drawings

d. Cuts

e. Performance data

f. List of reference projects of similar size, value and complexity

g. Model numbers

h. Other information necessary to completely describe item.

3. Provide a point by point comparison between key features of specified Basis of Design item and proposed substitution.

4. Provide submitted materials marked with Article and Paragraph references from Specification using highlighter, marker and flags on pages to facilitate review and show that substitution meets specified requirements.

5. Provide a letter indicating requestor has reviewed Contract Documents and examined site (if needed) and that proposed substitution meets specified requirements.

C. Accepted substitutions will be published in writing. No information or indication of acceptance will be provided by means other than written Addenda during bidding or Architect’s written construction administration document following bidding. Refer to “Limitations on Substitutions after Bids or During Construction" in this Section.

D. Bid and construct according to Contract Documents unless approval of substitution is provided in writing.


Project # 4181220


01 6000-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

E. Architect is not obligated to state reasons for rejecting substitution.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. "Product" means material, equipment, assembly, system, manufacturer, brand, trade name,

B. element, item or similar as applicable.

1. Provide new products free from defects and deficiencies unless otherwise noted.

2. Provide components and accessories necessary for a complete system by same manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

C. Terms such as “approved substitute”, "equal to", "accepted by", "approved by", or other synonymous terms mean that acceptance of proposed product is subject to approval by Architect after submittal requirements are met. Architect’s decision is final and binding.

D. Available Manufacturer’s: See below.

E. Except where "no substitutions" or "same as existing" “match existing” are noted, term "or approved substitute" is implied throughout, subject to prior approval conditions specified including where the term available manufacturer’s is included.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 PRODUCTS

A. Architect and Owner reserve right to accept or reject proposed product. Should a proposed product be unable to meet requirements to satisfaction of Architect, product shall not be used. No additional compensation will be allowed for required Work resulting from use of product accepted by Addendum.

B. Use only one brand, manufacturer, source or type for like products unless otherwise approved or specified. Contractor is obligated to do so unless otherwise approved in writing.

C. Provide pricing based on products listed in Contract Documents. Contract award is based on use of specified products or substitutions approved prior to bidding or pricing.

1. By execution of Contract, Contractor agrees and understands Work will be accomplished with products specified or accepted by substitution.

2. Basis of Design Products:

a. Reference to “Basis of Design” and a named specific product or manufacturer is intended to establish criteria for use of that product and manufacturer based on that products published information whether or not those criteria are explicitly stated in Specifications.

b. Criteria may establish higher performance requirement than specified reference or performance standards. Such reference is intended to establish minimum level of quality, standard of design, function, appearance, type, strength, durability, construction, efficiency, sound level, finish, appearance, availability, service and similar characteristics determined necessary for Project.

c. Specification criteria including basis of design products are considered as a whole.

d. Other products or manufacturers listed meet features, performance, appearance and other criteria established by that product or manufacturer even if product must be customized to meet those criteria.


Project # 4181220



01 6000-3

e. When other products are listed in a Section those products may be used if they meet entire specification criteria including criteria implied by product listed as basis of design. Meeting some requirements but not meeting criteria established by basis of design product does not qualify as meeting specified requirements.

f. Products or manufacturers accepted for substitution will be acceptable provided they fully comply with requirements and match basic and essential criteria of product used for basis of specification or design, including level of fabrication quality, as determined by Architect.

3. Contractor, supplier, or manufacturer providing products other than the basis of design shall bear cost of required modifications to spaces, services, utilities, and other features as a result of accepting substitute products, including but not limited to:

a. Design fees associated with changes.

4. Reference Standards for Products:

a. When references to Federal Specification, ASTM Standard, American National Standards Institute (ANSI) or similar association standards are listed for product quality, provide an acceptable affidavit certifying that proposed substitution for this Project meets with same standard.

b. Submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.

5. Substitute products shall:

a. Be available in same range of colors, textures, dimensions, gauges, types, and finishes as specified product.

b. Be equal to specified item in strength, durability, efficiency, serviceability, ease and cost of maintenance.

c. Be compatible with building design

d. Not necessitate design modifications.

e. Not impose additional work or require changes in work of Prime Contractor, or other Subcontractor, vendor, or materials supplier.

f. Not add cost to Owner.

g. Be similar in essential fabrication features.

6. Contractor, supplier or manufacturer providing accepted substitute product shall bear cost of required modifications to spaces, services, utilities and other features as result of accepting substitute products, including but not limited to:

a. Larger capacity mechanical or electrical service, devices or utilities resulting from acceptance of product for bidding purposes.

b. Modification to pipes, conduits, ducts, and controls for conveying, distributing, and controlling those services or utilities.

c. Modification to insulation, wrappings, coatings, or other integral features of lines or items conveying those lines.

d. Design fees associated with changes.


Project # 4181220


01 6000-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

9. Timely Placement of Product Orders: Place product orders in a timely manner, within ten days after acceptance of submitted list of materials.

2.2 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER BIDS OR DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Intent is to limit unnecessary substitutions after bids. Changes will not be allowed to accepted list of products, except when specified or accepted product subsequently is determined as not meeting requirements of Contract Documents or product becomes unavailable, and then only under following conditions:

1. Orders were placed in timely manner as required after list of materials is accepted. No excuse or proposed substitution will be considered for products due to unavailability unless proof is submitted that firm orders were placed in a timely manner.

2. Reason for unavailability is beyond control of Contractor: prolonged strikes or lockouts which will delay Project to an extent unacceptable to Owner, bankruptcy, discontinuance of a product, delays or Acts of God or other similar reasons.

3. Request for substitution is submitted in writing within 10 days after date Contractor becomes aware product does not comply with specifications or has become unavailable, accompanied by supporting evidence.

4. No extra cost to Owner.

5. Substitution does not compromise design intent or quality required.

6. Substitute product is acceptable to Owner and Architect.

7. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

8. Requested substitution does not require revisions to Contract Documents.

9. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce intended and indicated results.

10. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

11. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.

12. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

13. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of Work.

14. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of Work.

15. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

16. If requested substitution involves more than one trade, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to installers involved.


END OF SECTION


EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS


01 7000-1

SECTION 01 7000

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.

B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.

C. Cutting and patching.

D. Cleaning and protection.

E. Starting of systems and equipment.

F. Substantial Completion

G. Final Completion

H. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.

2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.

3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.

4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.

5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.

6. Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include in request:

a. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

b. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

c. Identification of Project.

d. Location and description of affected work.

e. Necessity for cutting or alteration.

f. Description of proposed work and products to be used.


Project # 4181220


01 7000-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

g. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor.

h. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.

i. Date and time work will be executed.

j. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

k. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

l. Architect's/Engineer's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

m. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required.

B. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect/Engineer. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Life Safety Elements: Do not cut and patch life safety elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

F. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.


Project # 4181220



01 7000-3

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.

C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.

1. Provide dust-proof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors.

2. Provide dust-proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be occupied by Owner.

E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.

1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.

2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.

3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays.

4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures.

F. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations.

G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.

C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.


Project # 4181220


01 7000-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. Additionally, attach a copy of work required for each room to the door entering the room. Subcontractor and Superintendent to initial as each Work item is completed. Attach supplemental lists as required.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases by applicable authorities having jurisdiction.

5. Prepare and submit updated Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Complete startup testing and balancing of building systems, submit final test & balance reports to engineer.

7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

8. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance (including Operation & Maintenance Manuals).

9. Owner training shall have been completed.

10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

B. Inspection Procedures: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of the requested Substantial Completion inspection date. On receipt of request, Architect may notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. On date of inspection, Architect will conduct a review and either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor that the project is not Substantially Complete due to unfulfilled requirements.

1. Upon inspection the Architect and the Owner’s representative will accompany the Contractor on a walk-through review of the Contractor’s punch list. Should the Architect and/or the Owner’s representative observe work which is incomplete or defective which is not included on the contractor’s punch list, the Architect will prepare a supplemental punch list of items to be completed or corrected.


Project # 4181220



01 7000-5

2. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

3. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for establishing Final Completion.

1.8 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Price and Payment Procedures".

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Contractor. The certified copy of the list shall state that the Work, including each item on the list has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Provide explanations for each proposed resolution to incomplete items.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Obtain signed attendance sheets and submit them to the Architect.

B. Inspection Procedures: Submit a written request for inspection for Final Completion, a minimum of (7) days in advance of the requested Final Completion Inspection Date. On receipt of request, Architect [and Construction Manager] may notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. On date of inspection, Architect [and Construction Manager] will conduct a review and either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor that the project is not Finally Complete due to unfulfilled requirements.

1. Upon Inspection the Architect and the Owner’s representative will accompany the Contractor’s superintendent on a walk-through review of the Substantial Completion punch list.

2. Architect will process the final Application for Payment after inspection providing all closeout documentation has been received and is acceptable, or the Architect will notify Contractor of construction and/or documentation that must be completed or corrected before final Application for Payment will be processed.

1.9 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit one electronic copy of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.


Project # 4181220


01 7000-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3. Indicate the subcontractor responsible for each item; provide spaces for subcontractor and superintendent to initial each item as Work is completed.

4. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

1.10 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

E. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

C. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.


Project # 4181220



01 7000-7

D. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 CLEANING PRODUCTS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

G. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

H. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

D. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

E. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

F. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

G. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.


Project # 4181220


01 7000-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.4 ALTERATIONS

A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only.

1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.

2. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove items indicated on drawings.

2. Relocate items indicated on drawings.

3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish.

4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.

C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction.

1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel.

2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required.

3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.

a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages.

b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.

4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.


Project # 4181220



01 7000-9

5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction.

D. Protect existing work to remain.

1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.

2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.

3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.

E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.

F. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.

G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:

1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match.

H. Clean existing systems and equipment.

I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury.

J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.

K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.

C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.

2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.

3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.

4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.

5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.


Project # 4181220


01 7000-10 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.

7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

E. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials such as concrete and masonry using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

J. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.

3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

4. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

5. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.


Project # 4181220



01 7000-11

6. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

7. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

8. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.


Project # 4181220


01 7000-12 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.10 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.

2. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

3. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

4. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

5. Clean filters of operating equipment.

6. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and drainage systems.

7. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

8. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

9. Clean Owner-occupied areas of work.

10. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

11. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

12. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

13. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

14. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.


Project # 4181220



01 7000-13

15. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

16. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

17. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

18. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

19. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

20. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.

21. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

22. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer when work is considered ready for Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection.

C. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection.

D. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect/Engineer's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect/Engineer.

E. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.

F. Notify Architect/Engineer when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect/Engineer's Substantial Completion final inspection.

G. Complete items of work determined by Architect/Engineer listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


01 7000-14 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


CUTTING AND PATCHING


01 7329-1

SECTION 01 7329

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

8. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.


Project # 4181220

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-2 Issued for Bid

03-27-2018

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Primary operational systems and equipment.

2. Air or smoke barriers.

3. Fire-suppression systems.

4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

5. Control systems.

6. Communication systems.

7. Conveying systems.

8. Electrical wiring systems.

9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

2. Membranes and flashings.

3. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

4. Equipment supports.

5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.


Project # 4181220

CUTTING AND PATCHING Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 01 7329-3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.


Project # 4181220

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-4 Issued for Bid

03-27-2018

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete / Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

END OF SECTION

MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Stationn (MCTS) Tarping Area Enclosure

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


01 7800-1

SECTION 01 7800

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Project Record Documents.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data.

C. Warranties and bonds.


A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples.

B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.

C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.

3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

C. Warranties and Bonds:

1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.


Project # 4181220

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:

1. Drawings.

2. Addenda.

3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

4. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

5. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:

1. Field changes of dimension and detail.

2. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:

1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.

2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.

4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products.


Project # 4181220

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 01 7800-3

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

I. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.4 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.

B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system.

C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 280 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch (50 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified.

G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment.

H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.

I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

3.5 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.


Project # 4181220

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

C. Co-execute submittals when required.

D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

E. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.

F. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.

G. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION


DEMONSTRATION AND

TRAINING


01 7900-1

SECTION 01 7900

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections.

B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:

1. Items specified in individual product Sections.

C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for:

1. Items specified in individual product Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session.

1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals.

2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals.

3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data.


A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems.

1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.

2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL

A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.

B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless Owner personnel training is specified.

C. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.


Project # 4181220


01 7900-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.

1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures.

1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

3.2 TRAINING - GENERAL

A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted.

B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.

C. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.

D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Commissioning Authority.

E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.

F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed and will provide approval forms.

G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up" time.

H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss:

1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies.

2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information.

3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.

I. Product- and System-Specific Training:

1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.

2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies.

3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance.

4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.

5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures.


Project # 4181220



01 7900-3

6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.

7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.

8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage.

9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.

10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.

11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.

J. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


01 7900-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


03 3000-1

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.

2. Foundation walls.


A. AASHTO M 182 - Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotten Mats; 2005.

B. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010.

C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).

D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.

E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010.

F. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).

G. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.

H. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015.

I. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2014.

J. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009.

K. ASTM C1017/C1017M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete; 2013.

L. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 2013.

M. ASTM C1064/C1064M - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.

N. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2013.

O. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.

P. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2015.

Q. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00487427&item_key_date=871231&input_doc_number=AASHTO%20M%20182&input_doc_title=

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ACI%20117


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ACI%20305R




http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A615/A615M



https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00321531&item_key_date=840731&input_doc_number=C1017&input_doc_title=

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1059/C1059M




https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C150/C150M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C171


Project # 4181220

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

R. ASTM C172/C172M - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 2010.

S. ASTM C219 - Standard Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement; 2014.

T. ASTM C231/C231M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 2014.

U. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.

V. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 2012.

W. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.

X. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2015a.

Y. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.

Z. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2015.

AA. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2014.

AB. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015.

AC. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.












https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20D1.4/D1.4M


Project # 4181220

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 03 3000-3

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Bonding agents.

6. Adhesives.

7. Joint-filler strips.

8. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete, Sections 1 through 5.



https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E329




Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Concrete subcontractor.

e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review the following items:

a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control

b. Concrete finishes and finishing

c. Cold- and hot- weather concreting procedures

d. Curing procedures

e. Construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint filler strips

f. Forms and form removal limitations

g. Vapor barrier installation

h. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances

i. Steel reinforcement installation

j. Floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement

k. Concrete repair procedures

l. Concrete protection

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.



Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 03 3000-5

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. Supporting reinforcement on clay brick supports is not acceptable.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F or Class C.






Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. For slabs-on-grade and concrete exposed to view use fine aggregage with a proven history of not being susceptible to popouts, imported sand if necessary.

C. Water: ASTM C94/C94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: Flexible, closed-cell polyethylene with tear off strip for sealant installation.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881/C881M, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.










https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00487427&item_key_date=871231&input_doc_number=AASHTO%20M%20182&input_doc_title=





Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 03 3000-7

2.8 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109/C109M.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: Concrete mix shall be proportioned to achieve a maximum slump of 9" for concrete containing high range water reducing admixture, 6" for concrete containing a mid-range water reducing admixture, or 4" for other concrete. All mixes shall have a water slump of 2" to 3".






Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 inch (25 mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: Concrete mix shall be proportioned to achieve a maximum slump of 9" for concrete containing high range water reducing admixture, 6" for concrete containing a mid-range water reducing admixture, or 4" for other concrete. All mixes shall have a water slump of 2" to 3".

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1 inch (25 mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.







Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 03 3000-9

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor barrier. Repair damage and reseal vapor barrier before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.



Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) into concrete.

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls at distance needed for construction sequencing. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.



Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 03 3000-11

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inch (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305R and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.







Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306R for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.




Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 03 3000-13

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308R, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 inch (300 mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inch (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3.9 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.



Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Verification of use of required design mixture.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 03 3000-15

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172/C172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard 6 inch by 12 inch cylinder specimens for each composite sample or two sets of three standard 4 inch by 8 inch cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one set of laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens for 6 in by 12 inch cylinders or three specimens for 4 inch by 8 inch cylinders obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.









Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 (C42M) or by other methods as directed by Architect.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION


STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING


05 1200-1

SECTION 05 1200


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Grout.


A. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2010.

B. AISC 341 - Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010.

C. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010.

D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015.

E. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

F. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.

G. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.

H. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a (Reapproved 2014).

I. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007.

J. ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2014.

K. ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings; 2009 (Reapproved 2015).

L. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011 (Reapproved 2015).

M. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2014.

N. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments; 2013.

O. ASTM E165/E165M - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry; 2012.

P. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2014.

Q. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).

https://www.aisc.org/publications/

http://www.aisc.org/store/c-2-manuals.aspx

http://www.aisc.org/store/c-18-specifications-and-codes.aspx


https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A36/A36M



https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A563

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A563M





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E164

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E165/E165M




Project # 4181220

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

R. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a.

S. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

T. ASTM F436/F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2016.

U. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.

V. AWS D1.8/D1.8M - Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement; 2016.

W. RCSC (HSBOLT) - Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts; Research Council on Structural Connections; 2009.

X. SSPC-PA 1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel; 2004.

Y. SSPC-PS Guide 7.00 - Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems; 1982.

Z. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.

AA. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

AB. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F1554

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F3125/F3125M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F436/F436M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20D1.1/D1.1M

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00473125&item_key_date=831231&input_doc_number=AWS%20D1%2E8&input_doc_title=

http://www.boltcouncil.org/

https://global.ihs.com/search_res.cfm?&rid=BSD&input_doc_number=SSPC-PA%201

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&item_s_key=00467058&item_key_date=950130&input_doc_number=SSPC%2DPS%207&input_doc_title=

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?&rid=BSD&input_doc_number=SSPC-Paint%2033&item_s_key=00093635&item_key_date=990329&org_code=SSPC&doc_type=TSDC&origin=SMDO

http://www.sspc.org/sspc-sp-2-hand-tool-cleaning.html

http://www.sspc.org/sspc-sp-3-power-tool-cleaning.html



Project # 4181220



05 1200-3


A. Qualification Data: For Fabricator.

B. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

2. Shop primers.

3. Nonshrink grout.

C. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU (certified buildng fabricator) at the time of bidding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

2. AISC 341 "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings".

3. AISC 360 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings".

4. RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. Channels, Angles, M or S-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M.



http://www.aisc.org/store/c-2-manuals.aspx


http://www.boltcouncil.org/




Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade C, structural tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade C (ASTM A563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563 Grade DH (A563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating.

C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

3. Finish: Plain.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

1. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected.

3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard, oversized, or slotted bolt holes as indicated on drawings, perpendicular to metal surfaces.


















Project # 4181220



05 1200-5

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1

F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated otherwise on drawings..

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inch (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).

5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A123/A123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

3. Galvanize items indicated to be galvanized on Drawings.







Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner reserves the right to engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

2. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".

3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.

d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94.

4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

a. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

b. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

5. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.










Project # 4181220



05 1200-7

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates,Bearing Plates, and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303.

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.










Project # 4181220


04-05-2018


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".

2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

a. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1) Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M.

2) Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

3) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.

4) Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94.

3. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

END OF SECTION











http://www.sspc.org/sspc-sp-2-hand-tool-cleaning.html

http://www.sspc.org/sspc-sp-3-power-tool-cleaning.html


METAL GRATING STAIRS


05 5119-1

SECTION 05 5119

METAL GRATING STAIRS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes industrial-type, straight-run stairs with steel-grating treads and railings attached to metal grating stairs.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For metal grating stairs and the following:

1. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 (D1.1M), "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D.

D. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A36/A36M or steel strip, ASTM A1011/A1011M or ASTM A1018/A1018M.

E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510/A510M.

F. Cast-Abrasive Nosings: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both.








https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?document_name=ASTM%20A1018%2FA1018M&item_s_key=00380985&item_key_date=830330




Project # 4181220

METAL GRATING STAIRS 05 5119-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

C. Weld connections to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.

D. Fabricate joints that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.5 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Industrial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20B633











http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F%20594

http://www.sspc.org/sspc-paint-20-zinc-rich-coating-type-1-inorganic-and-type-ii-organic.html/

http://www.naamm.org/


Project # 4181220

METAL GRATING STAIRS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 05 5119-3

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated.

3. Weld or Bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers.

C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with 1 1/4-by-3/16 inch bearing bars at 15/16 inch o.c. (32-by-5 mm bearing bars at 24 mm o.c.) and crossbars at 4 inch (100 mm) o.c.

2. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with openings in gratings no more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension.

3. Surface: Plain.

4. Finish: Galvanized.

5. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosing and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.

6. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads. Provide toeplates at open-sided edges of grating platforms. Weld grating to platform framing.

2.6 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 05 5213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."

1. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of pressed steel, as shown.

2. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings.

3. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6.




Project # 4181220

METAL GRATING STAIRS 05 5119-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.

B. Set steel-stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

END OF SECTION



PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS


05 5213-1

SECTION 05 5213

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.





Project # 4181220

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.2 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed) or ASTM A513/A513M.

B. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329/F2329M for zinc coating.

2. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

3. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594.




https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?document_name=ASTM%20F2329%2FF2329M&item_s_key=00661439&item_key_date=951130







http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F%20594


Project # 4181220

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 05 5213-3


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.



3. Remove flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.

J. Form Changes in Direction as Follows:

1. As detailed.

2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.



Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

K. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

O. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.

2. Comply with ASTM A123/A123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.

3. Comply with ASTM A153/A153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.


5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.




Project # 4181220

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 05 5213-5

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inch (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inch (150 mm) of post.

3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends.

C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.


A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



Project # 4181220


04-05-2018


BAR GRATINGS


05 5313-1

SECTION 05 5313

BAR GRATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Welded steel grating

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual"

B. Welded Steel Grating :

1. Bearing Bar Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Bearing Bar Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Bearing Bar Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Crossbar Spacing: As indicated on Drawings

5. Traffic Surface: Plain.

6. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. of coated surface (550 g/sq. m of coated surface).




Project # 4181220

BAR GRATINGS 05 5313-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A36/A36M or steel strip, ASTM A1011/A1011M or ASTM A1018/A1018M.

C. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510/A510M.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563 and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:




F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop unless otherwise indicated.

















Project # 4181220

BAR GRATINGS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 05 5313-3

2. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field.

3. Toeplate Height: 4 inch (100 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

G. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.

1. Provide no fewer than four saddle clips for each grating section containing rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) or less in thickness and spaced 15/16 inch (24 mm) or more o.c., with each clip designed and fabricated to fit over two bearing bars.

2. Furnish self-drilling fasteners with washers for securing grating to supports.

H. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.

1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars.

I. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.

2.5 STEEL FINISHES

A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products.


PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

F. Field Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:





Project # 4181220

BAR GRATINGS 05 5313-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018



3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.

C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.


A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

END OF SECTION



METAL PANEL NON-INSULATED PANELS


07 4100-1

SECTION 07 4100


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Field assembled metal wall panel system including a sealed vapor barrier liner panel, insulation, subgirts and concealed fastener exterior profile.

B. Uninsulated single-skin exposed fastener metal wall panel system.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 501.1 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure.

2. AAMA 620 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Aluminum Substrates.

3. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM A 755/A 755M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products.

3. ASTM B 209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.

4. ASTM C 236 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box.

5. ASTM C 754 - Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Panel Products.

6. ASTM C 920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

7. ASTM C 1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.

8. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction.

9. ASTM E 112 - Standard Test Method for Determining Average Grain Size.

10. ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen.

11. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.


Project # 4181220


07 4100-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

1. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. Code of Standard Practice.

E. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. ASCE-7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA):

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Metal Wall Panels and Metal Liner Panel Wall System: Single-skin exposed fastener metal wall panels applied as the exterior cladding over wall framing girts with batt insulation (providing R value of 13) in scrim draped between girt and exterior metal wall panels and interior metal liner panels

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide metal wall panel assemblies meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing agency on manufacturer's standard assemblies.

B. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) per ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa), using minimum 10-by-10 foot (3050-by-3050 mm) test panel that includes side joints.

C. Water Penetration, Static Pressure: No uncontrolled water penetration per ASTM E 331 at a minimum static differential pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa), using minimum 10-by-10 foot (3050-by-3050 mm) test panel that includes side joints.

D. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, per ASTM E 72:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings.

2. Limits of Deflection: Metal wall panel assembly shall withstand scheduled wind pressure with the following allowable deflection:

3. Maximum allowable deflection limited to L/180 deflection of panel perimeter normal to plane of wall with no evidence of failure.

4. Secondary Metal Framing: Design secondary metal framing for metal wall panel assembly according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction.


Project # 4181220



07 4100-3

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data, test reports, and certifications in accordance with quality assurance and performance requirements specified herein.

B. Submit panel shop drawings consisting of design and erection drawings, finish specifications, and other data necessary to clearly describe the design, materials, sizes, layouts, construction details, and erection. Submit small-scale layouts of panels and large-scale details of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, penetrations, and special details. Distinction must be made between factory and field assembled work.

1. Drawings shall be approved prior to fabrication.

C. Material Samples:

1. Panels: One of each type, full panel width by 12 inches long.

2. Fasteners: Two of each type with statement of intended use.

3. Closures: One of each type metal closure and foam closure as required.

4. Sealants: One sample of each type with statement of intended use.

5. Clips: Two of each type.

D. Selection Samples for Color: For each finish product specified, furnish two color chip samples selected from the manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples for Color: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 square inches, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Qualification Information: For Installer firm, proof of installer's manufacturer trained field supervisor.

G. Warranty: Submit proposed warranty meeting requirements of this Section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have had a minimum of ten years of experience in the successful completion of projects employing similar materials, applications, and performance requirements.

1. Manufacturer shall provide a list of five similar completed projects with addresses of the project location, architect, and owner.

B. Installer Qualifications: The wall systems contractor shall have had a minimum of five years of experience in the successful completion of projects employing similar materials, applications, and performance requirements.

1. The wall systems contractor shall provide a list of five similar completed projects with addresses of the project location, architect, and owner.

C. Calculations supporting structural performance of the wall panels shall be prepared by a professional structural engineer.

D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.

1. Finish areas designated by Architect.


Project # 4181220


07 4100-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect.

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site in compliance with Division 01 requirements.


A. Materials shall be unloaded and stored per the manufacturer's instructions to prevent damage due to handling and weather.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Material Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant that the materials and accessories furnished in accordance with these specifications shall remain free from defects in material and factory workmanship for a period of two years from date of shipment.

B. Paint Finish Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant against fading, chalking, peeling, cracking, checking, chipping, or erosion to base metal of the exterior panel finish, in accordance with the paint supplier's standards.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Behlen Building Systems: 4025 E. 23rd St. Columbus, NE 68601

B. Substitutions allowed for equivalent metal panel products only with architect or engineer’s approval.

C. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 01. Evidence shall be submitted to demonstrate equivalency to the products and performance levels specified. The written request shall include:

1. A complete description of the substitution, including details of all transition conditions at panel termination points.

2. Independent test reports verifying compliance with the performance requirements.

3. A detailed list of each item that does not fully comply with the specifications.

4. A letter stating that the manufacturer or wall systems contractor proposing the substitution will pay additional costs incurred by subcontractors affected by the proposed substitution.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Roll-formed profile shall be the manufacturer’s architectural panel configuration (ribs pointing in or reverse roll configuration). Panels shall have 1 3/16" deep major ribs spaced at 12" on center, with minor ribs between major ribs. Each panel shall provide a net coverage width of 36".

1. Manufactured from 26 gauge 80,000 PSI

2. Provide wall panel assemblies (when installed with mastic in the walls) with no water penetration as defined in the test method when tested according to ASTM E331 at a static pressure differential of 12.0 psf.


Project # 4181220



07 4100-5

3. Substrate shall be Galvalume® AZ50 coating when painted and acrylic coated AZ55when unpainted in accordance with ASTM A792.

4. Sheets shall be coated with a fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) over primer with total DFT of 0.8 - 1.0. The reverse side shall be coated with pigmented polyester. Exterior color to be selected from manufacturer’s standard color choices.

5. Panels shall be one piece from base to eave for lengths less than 32’-0”. Endlaps, if required, shall be 4" and occur at a girt.

6. Liner panel, if required, shall be 26 gauge with a manufacturer’s standard color finish, roll-formed to manufacturer’s standard ribbed profile.

2.3 PRODUCTS

A. Match existing Metal Roof Panel system utilized elsewhere on existing building or if discontinued or stock unavailable then utilize Metal roof panel Basis of design: Behlen Building Systems ADP-1 roof panel

B. Substitutions allowed for equivalent metal panel products only with architect or engineer’s approval.

C. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 01. Evidence shall be submitted to demonstrate equivalency to the products and performance levels specified. The written request shall include:

1. A complete description of the substitution, including details of all transition conditions at panel termination points.

2. Independent test reports verifying compliance with the performance requirements.

3. A detailed list of each item that does not fully comply with the specifications.

4. A letter stating that the manufacturer or wall systems contractor proposing the substitution will pay additional costs incurred by subcontractors affected by the proposed substitution.

2.4 ROOF PANELS

A. Match existing Metal Roof Panel system utilized elsewhere on existing building or if discontinued or stock unavailable then utilize Metal roof panel Basis of design: Behlen Building Systems ADP-1 roof panel

1. See specification section 07 6100 Metal Roofing

2.5 METAL WALL PANEL ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Wall Panel Backup System: Refer to related specification section for requirements,

B. Metal Wall Panel Accessories, General: Provide complete metal wall panel assembly incorporating trim, copings, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, sills, inside and outside corners, and miscellaneous flashings. Provide manufacturer's factory-formed clips, shims, flashings, gaskets, lap tapes, closure strips, and caps for a complete installation. Fabricate and install accessories in accordance with SMACNA Manual and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation manuals.

C. Extruded Trim: Manufacturer's complementary aluminum extrusions for head, jamb, sill, base, flush, reveal, inside and outside corner, endwall, and expansion joint details. Finish Kynar-color to be selected by Architect.


Project # 4181220


07 4100-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

D. Mitered Corners: Structurally-bonded horizontal interior and exterior trimless corners matching metal wall panel material, profile, and factory-applied finish, fabricated and finished by metal wall panel manufacturer.

1. Welded, riveted, fastened, or field- fabricated corners do not meet the requirements of this specification.

E. Formed Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and color of metal wall panel face sheets.

F. Sealants: Type recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer for application, meeting requirements of Joint Sealants section.

G. Flashing Tape: 4 inches (102 mm) wide self-adhering butyl flashing tape.

H. Fasteners, General: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, and other acceptable fasteners recommended by panel manufacturer. Where exposed fasteners cannot be avoided for miscellaneous applications, supply corrosion-resistant fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means factory-applied coating.

2.6 METAL LINER PANEL FINISHES

A. Finish fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) over primer with total DFT of 0.8 - 1.0. The reverse side shall be coated with pigmented polyester. Exterior color to be selected from manufacturer’s standard color choices.- color to be selected by Architect.

B. Color:

1. Interior Exposed Surface: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

2. Concealed Surface: Manufacturer's standard primer color.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine metal wall panel substrate with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal wall panels.

B. Wall Substrate: Confirm that wall substrate is within tolerances acceptable to metal wall panel system manufacturer.

1. Maximum substrate and framing deviations from flat plane acceptable are determined by manufacturer’s tolerances

C. Framing: Inspect framing that will support metal wall panels to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable framing members at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal wall panels.

D. Air/Moisture Barriers: Confirm that work has been completed, inspected, and tested as required.

E. Openings: Verify that window, door, louver and other penetrations match layout on shop drawings.

F. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with metal wall panel system installation.


Project # 4181220



07 4100-7

3.2 SECONDARY FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Secondary Metal Subgirt Framing: Install secondary metal framing components to tolerances indicated, as shown on approved shop drawings. Install secondary metal framing and other metal panel supports per ASTM C 1007 and metal wall panel manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panels in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement

1. Insulated-Composite Metal Wall Backup Panels: Install in accordance with requirements of related section for Insulated-Composite Metal Wall Backup Panels.

B. Attach panels to metal framing using recommended clips, screws, fasteners, sealants, and adhesives indicated on approved shop drawings.

1. Fasteners for Steel Wall Panels: Stainless-steel for exterior locations and locations exposed to moisture; carbon steel for interior use only.

2. Fasten metal wall panels to supports with concealed clips at each joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.

3. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

4. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal wall panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealants where indicated on approved shop drawings.

3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panel accessories with positive anchorage to building and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install related flashings and sheet metal trim per requirements of section Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

2. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, lap strips, flashings, sealants, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

3. Comply with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions.

4. Provide concealed fasteners except where noted on approved shop drawings.

5. Set units true to line and level as indicated.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a service representative authorized by metal wall panel manufacturer to inspect completed installation. Submit written report.

B. Correct deficiencies noted in manufacturer's report.


Project # 4181220


07 4100-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective films. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired by finish touch-up or minor repair.

END OF SECTION


METAL ROOFING


07 6100-1

SECTION 07 6100

METAL ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all preformed roofing as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.

B. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.

C. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and deices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation.


A. Applicable Standards:

1. SMACNA: “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

2. LGSI: “Light Gage Structural Institute”.

3. AISC: “Steel Construction Manual” American Institute of Steel Construction.

4. AISI: “Cold Form Steel Design Manual” American Iron and Steel Institute (1996 Edition).

5. ASTM A792-83-AZ50 (Painted) & ASTM A792-83-AZ55 (Bare Galvalume Plus®): Specifications for steel sheet, aluminum-zinc alloy coated by the hot dip process, general requirements (Galvalume®).

6. ASTM E 1514-93: “Standard Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel Roof Panel Systems”, American Society for Testing and Materials.

7. UL580: “Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies”, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

8. UL2218: “Test Standard for impact Resistance”, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

9. ICBO: Evaluation Report No. ER-5409, ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.

10. ASTM E 1592-95: “Standard Test for Structural Performance of Sheeting Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference”, American Society for Testing and Materials.

11. ASTM E 1680-95: “Standard test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems”, American Society for Testing and Materials.

12. ASTM E 1646-95: “Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference”, American Society for Testing and Materials.

13. ASTM E 408-71: Standard Test Method for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using Inspection-Meter Techniques, (Energy Star® for Roof Products).

14. ASTM E 903-96: Standard Test Method for Solar Absorption, Using Integrating Spheres. (Energy Star® for Roof Products).


Project # 4181220

METAL ROOFING 07 6100-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications

1. Manufacturer has a minimum of five years’ experience in manufacturing metal roof systems of this nature. Panels specified in this section shall be produced in a factory environment (not with a portable roll former with fixed base roll forming equipment), and in line leveling assuring the highest level of quality control. A letter from the manufacturer certifying compliance will accompany the product materials submittals.

C. Installation Contractor’s Qualifications:

1. Installer of the system shall be an approved installer, certified by the manufacturer, before beginning of installation of the metal roof system, specifically for the selected system’s roof panels and meet the following minimum criteria:

a. Maintain $250,000 general liability coverage for each loss.

b. Maintain sufficient worker’s compensation coverage as mandated by law.

c. Have no viable claims pending regarding negligent acts or defective workmanship on previously performed or current projects.

d. Has not filed for protection from creditors under any state or federal insolvency or debtor relief statutes or codes.

e. Project foreman is the person having received specific training in the proper installation of the specified system and will be present to supervise whenever material is being installed. Specific training program shall include the following:

1) The instructor must have a minimum of 10 years’ experience.

2) A formal curriculum.

3) Classroom instruction with a review and thorough understanding of the specific product’s details.

4) The installer must pass a written and oral exam.

f. Provide five references from five different architects or building owners for projects that have been in service for a minimum of two years, stating satisfactory performance by the installer.

g. Provide certification letter that installer has a minimum of three years’ of metal product installation experience immediately preceding the date upon which work is to commence.

D. Pre-Installation Conference:

1. Prior to installation of roofing system, conduct a pre-installation conference at the project site.

2. Attendance: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Project Superintendent, and Roof Applicator.

3. Agenda:

a. Roofing details and agenda.

b. Critical work sequencing and review of phasing plan.

c. Inspection sequencing.


Project # 4181220

METAL ROOFING Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 07 6100-3

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Performance Testing:

1. Metal roof system must be tested in accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Test Method 580 “Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.”

2. Metal roof system must be installed in accordance with UL Construction method.

a. #180B min. 14 gauge purlin, 5’-0” on center max. with 29 gauge “D” panel low/high fixed/floating/articulating clips. Rigid insulation to be min. 1” thick.

3. Metal roof system must meet the air infiltration requirements of ASTM E 1680-954 when tested with a 6.24 PSF pressure differential. The resulting air infiltration leakage rate will be a minimum of (251 cfm/sq.ft.).

4. Metal roof system must meet the water penetration requirements of ASTM E 1646-95 when tested with a 12.00 PSF pressure differential with no uncontrollable water leakage when five gallons per hour of water is sprayed per square foot of roof area.

5. Metal roof panels shall be high reflectance and high emittance in accordance with Energy Star®. Initial Reflectance (Galvalume only) shall be at least 0.68 when tested with ASTM E-903. The three year aged reflectance shall be at least 0.57, when tested in accordance with ASTM E-1918 (measured as solar reflectivity, not visible reflectance).

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Roof Design Loads:

1. Design criteria shall be in accordance with the most current version of Indiana Building Code.

2. Dead Loads:

a. The dead load shall be the weight of the SSMR system. Collateral loads, such as sprinklers, mechanical and electrical systems, and ceilings shall not be attached to the panels.

3. Roof Snow Loads:

a. The design roof snow loads shall be as shown on the contract drawings.

4. Wind Loads:

a. The design wind uplift for the roof system shall be as shown on the contract drawings. The design uplift force for each connection assembly shall be that pressure given for the area under consideration, multiplied by the tributary load area of the connection assembly. The safety factor listed below shall be applied to the design force and compared against the ultimate capacity. Prying shall be considered when calculating fastener design loads.

1) Single fastener in each connection: 3.0

2) Two or more fasteners in each connection: 2.25

5. Thermal Loads:

a. Roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and contraction forces resulting from a total temperature range of 100 degrees F during the life of the structure.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

B. Framing Members Supporting the SSMR System

1. Any additions/revisions to framing members supporting the SSMR system to accommodate the manufacturer/fabricator’s design shall be submitted for review and approval. New or revised framing members and their connections shall be designed in accordance with applicable design specifications. Maximum deflection under applied live load, snow, or wind load shall not exceed L/240 of the span length.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit complete shop drawings and erection details, approved by the metal roofing manufacturer, to the architect (owner) for review. Do not proceed with manufacture of roofing materials prior to review of shop drawings and field verification of all dimensions. Do not use drawings prepared by the architect (owner) for shop or erection drawings.

2. Shop drawings show methods of erection, elevations and plans of roof and wall panels, sections and details, anticipated loads, flashings, roof curbs, vents, sealants, interfaces with all materials not supplied and proposed identification of component parts and their finishes.

B. Performance Tests:

1. Submit certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory or manufacturer’s lab (witnessed by a professional engineer) in accordance with specified test methods for each panel system.

C. Calculations:

1. Submit engineering calculations defining all cladding loads for all roof areas based on design criteria listed in Para 1.04 Design Requirements, allowable clip loads and required number of fasteners to secure the panel clips to the designated substructure.

2. Compute uplift loads on clip fasteners with full recognition of prying forces and eccentric clip loading.

3. Calculate holding strength of fasteners in accordance with submitted test data provided by Fastener Manufacturer based on length of embedment and properties of materials.

4. Submit thermal calculations and details of floating clip, flashing attachments, and accessories certifying the free movement in response to the expansion/contraction forces resulting from a total temperature differential of 110 degrees F.

D. Samples:

1. Submit samples and color chips for all proposed finishes.

a. Submit one 8-inch long sample of panel, including clips.

b. Submit two 3-inch x 5 inch color chip samples in color selected by the architect (owner).

E. Warranties:

1. Finish: Metal roof system manufacturer, upon final acceptance for project, furnish a warranty. Provide the following warranty:

a. Covering panel finish against cracking, checking, blistering, peeling, flaking, chipping, chalking and fading for a period of twenty (20) years.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 07 6100-5

2. Weathertightness: Metal roof system manufacturer shall submit a specimen copy of manufacturer’s Weathertightness Warranty, including evidence of application for warranty and manufacturer’s acceptance of the applicator and warranty conditions.

a. Single Source Warranty

F. Test Reports:

1. Submit Test Reports showing that metal panels have been tested in accordance with the Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference of ASTM E1592-95.

2. Metal roof system must meet the air infiltration requirements of ASTM E 1680-95 when tested with a 6.24 PSF pressure differential. The resulting air infiltration leakage rate will be a minimum of (251 cfm/sq.ft.).

3. Submit Test Reports showing that metal panels meet the water penetration requirements of ASTM E 1646-95 when tested with a 12.00 PSF pressure differential with no uncontrollable water leakage when five gallons per hour of water is sprayed per square foot of roof area.

4. Submit Evaluation Report No. ER-5409 showing that metal panel system details, engineering calculations, computer printouts, and data have been examined by the ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. and have been found to comply with the 1997 Uniform Building Code.

5. Metal Roof System Fabrication Certification:

a. Submit a letter from the metal panel manufacturer certifying the roof panels have been produced in a factory environment (not job site) with fixed-base roll forming equipment.

6. Installation Contractor’s Qualifications:

a. Submit certificate from manufacturer certifying that installer of the metal roof system has met all of the criteria outlined in “1.2 C. Installer’s qualifications” and is an authorized installer certified by the manufacturer within one year of the beginning of the installation of the metal roof system.

b. Submit the formal syllabus for the classroom and hands-on training.

c. Submit five references from five different architects or building owners for projects that have been in service for a minimum of two years, stating satisfactory performance by the installation contractor.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery:

1. Deliver metal roof system to job site properly packaged to provide protection against transportation damage.

B. Handling:

1. Exercise extreme care in unloading, storing and erecting metal roof system to prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

C. Storage:

1. Store all material and accessories above ground on well skidded platforms. Store under waterproof covering. Provide proper ventilation of metal roof system to prevent condensation build-up between each panel or trim/flashing component.

1.7 WEATHERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall provide to the Owner, a Single Source warranty signed by the roofing manufacturer of the Standing Seam Roof System as outlined below.

B. Single Source Warranty: Single Source Warranties require a certified installer on site at all times.

1. For a period of twenty (20) years from the date of substantial completion, the roofing manufacturer WARRANTS to the Building Owner (“Owner”): to furnish roof panels, flashing and related items used to fasten the roof panels and flashing including roof jack and curb attachments to the roof structure, will not allow intrusion of water from the exterior of the roofing manufacturer’s Roof System into the building envelope when exposed to ordinary weather conditions and ordinary wear and usage. The Date of substantial completion is the date that is certified by the Architect, Owner, or Owner’s Representative, when the roofing manufacturer’s Roofing System is completed and accepted by or on behalf of the Owner.

C. Manufacturer’s Field Service

1. During installation, provide for two on-site inspections of roof application by qualified technical representative of the manufacturer.

2. Upon completion of installation, provide final inspection by a technical representative of roofing manufacturer to confirm that roofing system has been installed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

3. The Roofing manufacturer shall have the SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE obligation for all warranty work commencing on the date of substantial completion and under all circumstances terminated on the 20th anniversary of the date certified as Substantial Completion of the roofing manufacturer’s Roof System. During the period in which the roofing manufacturer has any warranty obligation, the roofing manufacturer shall take appropriate actions necessary to cause the non-performing portions of the Roof System to perform their proper functions.

D. Roofing Manufacturer’s Liability

1. The total liability of the roofing manufacturer under Single Source Warranty.

2. Single Source Warranty III, a no dollar limit of the manufacturer’s Roof System as invoiced to the roofing manufacturer’s customer.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 07 6100-7

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Behlen Building Systems: 4025 E. 23rd St. Columbus, NE 68601

1. Metal roof panel Basis of design:

a. Match existing Metal Roof Panel system utilized elsewhere on existing building or if discontinued or stock unavailable then utilize Metal roof panel Basis of design: Behlen Building Systems ADP-1 roof panel

1) Ribbed roof panel.

2) Panels shall have 1 3/16" deep major ribs spaced at 12" on center, with minor ribs between major ribs. Each panel shall provide a net coverage width of 36"..

3) Provide roof panel assemblies with permanent resistance to air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.005 cfm/sf of fixed roof area when tested according to ASTM E1680 at a static pressure differential of 6.24 psf.

4) Provide roof panel assemblies with no water penetration as defined in the test method when tested according to ASTM E1646 at a static pressure differential of 12.0 ps.

5) Provide roof panel assemblies with UL 90 uplift rating in accordance with UL 580 “Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies”.

6) Panels shall be one piece for slope lengths less than 41’-6”. Endlaps, if required, shall be 6" and occur at a purlin..

7) Substrate shall be Galvalume AZ50 coating in accordance with ASTM A792. Sheets shall be coated with a fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) over primer with total DFT of 0.8 - 1.0. The reverse side shall be coated with pigmented polyester. Exterior color to be selected from manufacturer’s standard color choices.

8) Utilize manufacture’s attachments, fasteners and trim pieces associated with installation of roof panel system or manufacturer approved substitutes.

b. Or approved substitution.

1) Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 01. Evidence shall be submitted to demonstrate equivalency to the products and performance levels specified. The written request shall include:

(a) A complete description of the substitution, including details of all transition conditions at panel termination points.

(b) Independent test reports verifying compliance with the performance requirements.

(c) A detailed list of each item that does not fully comply with the specifications.

(d) A letter stating that the manufacturer or wall systems contractor proposing the substitution will pay additional costs incurred by subcontractors affected by the proposed substitution.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

B. Acceptable Curb and Equipment Support units:

1. LM Curbs - Longview, TX

2. Approved equivalent.

C. Prefabricated Roof Jacks:

1. SFS-INTECH - Wyomissing, PA.

2. ITW Buildex, Itasca, IL.

3. Approved Equivalent.

D. Rooftop Walkways:

1. LM Curbs - Longview, TX.

2. Approved equivalent.


A. All self-tapping/self-drilling fasteners, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and other suitable fasteners shall be designed to withstand specified design loads.

1. Use long life fasteners for all exposed fastener applications.

2. Provide fasteners with a factory applied coating in a color to match metal roof system application.

3. Provide neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners.

4. Locate and space all exposed fasteners in a true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper torque settings to obtain controlled uniform compression for a positive seal without rupturing the neoprene washer.

B. Accessories

1. Provide all components required per the metal roof system manufacturer’s approved shop drawings for a complete metal roof system to include panels, panel clips, trim/flashing, fascia, ridge, closures, sealants, fillers and any other required items.

a. All outside closures will be fabricated from Galvanized or Pre-Painted Galvanized sheet steel of the same gauge, finish and color as the panels or trim as specified.

b. All tape seal is to be pressure sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with a release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-toxic, non-staining tape seal approved by the metal roof system manufacturer.

c. All joint sealant is to be a one-part elastomeric polyurethane sealant approved by the metal roof system manufacturer.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Material shall be in-line tension leveled prior to roll forming panel profile.

B. Where possible, roll form panels in continuous lengths, full length of detailed runs.

C. Standard panel length shall be no more than 45 feet long (for longer length availability, contact manufacturer).


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 07 6100-9

D. Fabricate trim, flashing and accessories to detailed profiles.

E. Fabricate trim and flashing from same material as panel.

2.4 PREFABRICATED CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Comply with loading and strength requirements as indicated where units support other work. Coordinate dimensions of curbs and supports with equipment supplier/manufacturer.

B. Fabricate curbs of structural aluminum (Min. 0.080 in. thickness for mechanical gear up to 1000 lbs; 0.125 in. thickness for mechanical gear between 1000 lbs. and 2000 lbs.; use a two curb system per the manufacturer above 2000 lbs.), factory primed and prepared for painting with mitered and welded corner joints. Provide integral base plates and water diverter crickets. The upper flange of the curb must be a minimum of 15” above the water diverter. (This allows 12” of free area after the panel is lapped over the flange on the high side). Curbs shall be designed to install under metal roof systems on the high side over the metal roof system on the low side.

C. Minimum height of curb shall be 8” above finished metal roof system.

D. Curbs shall be constructed to match slope of roof and provide a level top surface for mounting equipment.

E. Curb flanges shall be constructed to match configuration of roof panels.

F. Curb manufacturer will provide their own curb structural support system that can be installed between the purlins that will allow proper thermal movement of the curb with the roofing system.

G. Submit roof curb manufacturer’s shop drawings to metal roof system manufacturer for approval before fabrication of curbs.

2.5 PREFABRICATED ROOF JACKS

A. Pipe flashings shall be a one piece silicone molded rubber boot having a serviceable temperature range of -100°F to 437°F (for high temperature applications) and shall be resistant to ozone and ultraviolet rays. Units shall have an aluminum flanged base ring. Do not install pipe flashings through any panel seams - install ONLY in the flat portion of the panel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examination:

1. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this work may continue.

2. Verify that installation may be made in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. This specifically includes verifying that secondary structural and/or decking is installed to meet UL and building code requirements. Coordinate with metal roof system manufacturer to insure that reduced clip spacing at eave, rake, ridge and corner areas are accommodated.

B. Discrepancies:

1. In event of discrepancy, notify the architect (owner).

2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal roof system so that it is weathertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction.

B. Install metal roof system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings.

C. Provide concealed anchors at all panel attachment locations.

D. Install panels plumb, level and straight with seams and ribs parallel, conforming to design as indicated.

3.3 ROOF CURB INSTALLATION

A. Comply with metal roof system manufacturer’s approved shop drawings, instructions and recommendations for installation of roof curbs. Refer to metal roof system manufacturer’s standard installation details. Anchor curbs securely in place with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

3.4 CLEANING, PROTECTION

A. Dispose of excess materials and remove debris from site.

B. Clean work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Protect work against damage until final acceptance. Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the architect (owner), any work that becomes damaged prior to final acceptance.

D. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions.

E. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar metals such as copper, lead, graphite or cast iron. Water run-off from these materials is also prohibited. This specifically includes condensate from roof top A/C units.

END OF SECTION


SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


07 6200-1

SECTION 07 6200


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide sheet metal flashing systems, complete, in-place as detailed on the drawings and as specified herein. This section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:

1. Roof Drainage Systems

2. Exposed Trim and Fascia

3. Metal Counterflashings

4. Reglets

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A446-91: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process.

B. ASTM B209-92: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

C. FM (Factory Mutual): Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 - 49.

D. FS QQ-L-201: Specification for Lead Sheet.

E. SMACNA: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. At all locations noted in the drawings. Color shall be determined by the Architect/Engineer prior to ordering material.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under the general provisions of these specifications.

B. Manufacturer's Product Data

1. Metal material characteristics and installation recommendations.

2. Color chart for pre-finished metal. For acceptable manufacturers other than Petersen Aluminum Corporation, submit color chart prior to material ordering and/or fabrication so that equivalent colors to those specified can be approved.

C. Shop drawings

1. For manufactured and shop-fabricated gravel stops, fascias, copings, and all other sheet metal fabrications.

2. Show profile, joint details, corner details, and types and locations of fasteners.

3. Indicate type, gauge and finish of metal.


Project # 4181220


07 6200-2 Issued for Bid 03-27-2018


A. Reference Standards

1. Comply with details and recommendations of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for workmanship, methods of joining, anchorage, provisions for expansion, etc.

2. Factory Mutual loss prevention data sheet 1-28, Windstorm Resistance, 1-90 minimum

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Pre-finished metal material shall require a written 20-year non-prorated warranty covering fade, chalking and film integrity. The material shall not show a color change greater than 5 NBS color units per ASTM D2244, or chalking excess of 8 units per ASTM D659. If either occurs, material shall be replaced per warranty at no cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a notarized written warranty assuring all sheet metal work, including caulking and fasteners, to be water-tight and secure for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of the building. Warranty shall include all materials and workmanship required to repair any leaks that develop, and make good any damage to other work or equipment caused by such leaks or the repairs thereof. Refer to the sample warranty at the end of the roof membrane section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED EQUIVALENT

A. Contractor must submit to the architect/engineer a minimum of five days before the bid date any product not specified in order for product to be considered for approval. The architect/engineer will notify contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. Reference general provisions for substitution submittal requirements.

2.2 METAL FLASHING

A. Pre-finished Galvanized Steel

1. Acceptable Manufacturers.

a. Coordinate with building supplier of pre-engineered metal building (PEMB) package.

b. Approved equivalent.

2. Materials used to fabricate items including, but not limited to, scuppers, exposed trim, gravel stop, fascia, copings, counterflashings, and curb flashings shall have the following characteristics:

a. Material shall be 24 gauge (minimum) hot-dipped galvanized steel (AISI G90), primed and finished one side with 70% Kynar 500 resin based fluoropolymer coating 1.0 ± 0.1 mil dry film thickness.

b. A wash coat of 0.3 - 0.4 mil dry film thickness shall be applied to the reverse side.

c. The pre-painted finished side shall be coated with a factory installed strippable film for protection of the finished surface during shipping, fabrication, and installation. Plastic film must be removed immediately after installation.

d. Colors shall be as specified


Project # 4181220



07 6200-3

e. Thickness shall be 24 gauge (minimum) and shall increase in thickness as recommended by metal manufacturer as face height increases.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Stainless steel screws with EPDM washers of appropriate length and gauge, as recommended by metal manufacturer.

B. Material fasteners shall match that of metal which it secures (i.e. for aluminum - aluminum fasteners, etc.)

C. Fastening shall conform to Factory Mutual I-90 requirements or as stated on section details, whichever is more stringent.

2.4 JOINT COVERS, AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

A. Material as noted in details.

B. Accessories: Joint covers, corners, supports, strip flashing at joinings, fastening, and other accessories shall be included.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Welding Rods: Type recommended by sheet material manufacturer. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

B. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants."

C. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790,Type I, Style lb.

D. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.

E. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard:

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.

B. Shop Fabrication

1. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

2. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.


Project # 4181220


07 6200-4 Issued for Bid 03-27-2018

C. Seams:

1. Space joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Provide joint details in compliance with the recommendations of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for the thickness, girth, and type of metal.

D. Dissimilar Metals

1. Separate flashings from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Attachment:

1. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.

2. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.

3. Size cleats as recommended by of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the recommendations of the latest edition of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

2. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surface to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Roof-Edge Flashing: Secure metal flashing at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.

4. In locations where roof perimeter fascia exceeds a vertical face height of 8", fascia shall be installed with formed angles in the face to add rigidity and reduce out of flat appearance. Where vertical face height exceeds 12", a minimum of two formed angles shall be provided.


Project # 4181220



07 6200-5

5. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than one inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

6. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant.

7. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

8. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

a. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.

b. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

9. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant.

10. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal item for steep- sloped roofs with roofing installation.

11. Equipment Support Flashing, Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.

12. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:

a. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping a minimum of one inch, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing.

b. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


07 6200-6 Issued for Bid 03-27-2018

MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCTS) Tarping

JOINT SEALANTS


07 9000-1

SECTION 07 9000

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide caulking and sealant systems for all joints shown on the drawings or as specified herein to provide a positive barrier against passage of air and moisture.

B. Areas to be caulked and sealed include:

1. All openings and joints as shown on the drawings, and all joints which normally require caulking, include but not being limited to the following:

a. Joints between flashing and brick.

b. Metal roof flashing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials: Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

B. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.

C. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component.

D. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component.

E. FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base.

F. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be subject to Owner's review and approval.

B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and color availability.

C. Submit two sets of samples illustrating manufacturer's full range of colors for selection, if specifically requested by Architect/Engineer. Color to closely match color of surface to which it is applied.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

E. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Submit manufacturer's standard ten-year warranty. Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories against failure to achieve airtight or watertight seal or loss of adhesion, cohesion, or color stability.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years’ experience.


Project # 4181220

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9000-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofer’s Institute and manufacturer's requirements for installation.


A. Deliver materials in original unopened packages with manufacturer's labels, instructions and product identification (and lot) numbers intact and legible.

B. Store materials protected from the weather, in original containers or unopened packages, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install solvent-curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all sections referencing this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MULTI-PART NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT

A. Materials

1. FS TT-S-00227E, ASTM C920, Type M, Type II - non-sag, Class A; color as selected.

2. Products

a. Chem-Calk 500, Bostik Construction Products Division.

b. Dynatrol II; Pecora Corporation.

c. Sikaflex 2c NS; Sika Corporation.

d. Sonolastic NP 2; Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Backer Rod: Open cell polyurethane foam or closed cell polyethylene foam, compatible with sealant, sized and shaped to provide proper compression upon insertion in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene, TEFLON or polyurethane foam tape.

C. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape.

2.3 OTHER MATERIALS

A. All other materials not specifically described but required for complete and proper caulking and installation of sealants, shall be first quality of their respective kinds, new, and as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.


Project # 4181220

JOINT SEALANTS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 07 9000-3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements as shown on drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

C. All surfaces in contact with sealant shall be dry, sound, well-brushed, and wiped free from dust.

D. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags.

E. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by wire brushing.

F. Remove all laitance and mortar from the joint cavity.

G. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

H. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.

C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width, 1/4" minimum depth, 1/2" maximum depth, unless otherwise specifically allowed by sealant manufacturer. Avoid stretching, twisting, or braiding the backer rod.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Apply sealant under pressure with hand or power-actuated gun.

G. Guns shall have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as designed.

H. Thoroughly and completely mask all joints where the appearance of sealant on adjacent surfaces would be objectionable.

I. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, thoroughly filling all joints to the recommended depths.

J. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

K. Tool joints concave.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A. Clean work.

B. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.


Project # 4181220

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9000-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

C. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses.

D. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

E. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished installation under provision of Division 01.

B. Protect sealants until cured.

3.6 SCHEDULE

Location Type Color

General Exterior Locations Polyurethane, multi-component As Selected

END OF SECTION


STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES


08 1100-1

SECTION 08 1100

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Standard steel doors and frames manufactured in accordance with the Steel Door Institute (SDI) recommended standards.

B. Hardware reinforcing, anchorage and accessory items required for the above.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings showing the following minimum requirements: Elevations of each door type; elevations of each frame type; details of each frame type; location in the building for each item; condition at openings with various wall thicknesses and materials; typical and special details of construction, including cross-section of door construction; methods of assembling sections; location and installation requirements for hardware; size, shape and thickness of materials; joints and connections; and methods of anchorage.

2. Certification: Submit certification regarding galvanizing.


A. Regulatory Requirements

1. Testing Agency

a. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

b. Warnock-Hersey (WH)

B. Reference Standards

1. All items not specified otherwise in this section shall be in accordance with the latest edition of "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames", SDI 100 by the Steel Door Institute, as well as SDI 105 "Recommended Erection of Steel Frames", SDI 107-84 "Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement Application)", SDI 112-89 "Galvanized Standard Steel Doors and Frames", and SDI 117-88 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames".

2. International Building Code.

3. Whenever hollow metal assemblies are larger than limitation established by NFPA, provide manufacturer's certification that the assembly has been constructed with materials and methods equivalent to labeled construction.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery, storage and handling of hollow metal work shall be accomplished in such a manner as required to prevent damage, including deterioration of prime coat finish.


Project # 4181220

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1100-2 Issued for Bid

03-27-2018

B. Doors shall be stored in upright position in a protected and dry area, with bottom edge placed on wood strips over the ground or floor and doors shimmed to provide at least 1/4-inch space between individual units to promote air circulation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Standard Welded Frames: Frames (fire rated where scheduled) shall be one of the following products and manufacturers, or an equivalent approved in advance.

1. F-Series by Steelcraft Manufacturing Company.

2. Flush Frames by Curries Manufacturing Company.

3. Series SF 34 by the Ceco Corporation.

4. Full Flush Hollow Metal Doors: Doors shall be one of the following products and manufacturers, or an equivalent approved in advance:

a. L Doors by Steelcraft Manufacturing Company

b. 707 Series by Curries Manufacturing, Inc.

c. Imperial Series by the CECO Corporation.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strips: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568.

C. Fabrication methods shall comply with requirements listed hereinafter; only minor deviations which will allow manufacturer's standard fabrication methods to be used, and which do not contradict the intent of this specification, will be allowed.

D. Request for any deviation from these requirements should be made, in writing, at least ten (10) working days prior to date of bid opening. Lack of such requests will indicate manufacturer's intent to comply with this specification.

E. Doors and frames scheduled for label service shall be supplied with proper labels attached. Deviation between contract documents and UL requirements available from a particular manufacturer shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for consideration not less than ten (10) days before date of bid opening. If a change is approved, corrective addendum will be issued.

F. Label requirements and conditions are based on availability from one or more manufacturers. Inability of a manufacturer to meet these requirements shall not be justification for deviation from requirements of drawings and specifications.

G. Underwriters Laboratories labels shall be of a class as noted on Door Schedule. Labeled doors shall have labeled frames.

H. Frames shall be preassembled at the factory in the largest size units permitted by shipping restrictions for minimum assembly of related parts at the job site.


Project # 4181220

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 08 1100-3

2.3 METAL FRAMES

A. Frame assemblies shall be of size and profile required by drawings and schedules. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects. Fabricate members straight and true with corner joints well formed, in true alignment.

B. Steel shall be 16-gauge for interior locations and 14-gauge galvanized steel for exterior locations.

C. Corner joints shall have mitered frame, coped and butted stops, and be continuously welded for full depth and width of frame. All contact edges shall be closed tight, and all welds on exposed surfaces dressed smooth and flush.

D. Mullions, horizontal rails, transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction, shall member with heads and jambs, and be secured thereto with butt-welded joints reinforced with concealed clip angles. Members may be made of two pieces, interlocked at the base of the stops so as to make the joint visible.

E. All frames shall be of fully-welded construction; knocked down frames are not acceptable. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth and flush.

F. Glazed openings shall have one removable stop and one fixed stop. Removable stop shall be secured with countersunk, oval head, self-tapping screws at maximum spacing of 16-inch centers.

G. All hardware cutouts shall have a closed metal mortising box welded to frame.

H. Exterior frames shall receive factory-applied galvanized 16-gauge steel drips at head, welded in place.

I. Provide temporary spreader channel or angle at bottom of frames, or at both top and bottom where required.

J. Provide angle clips welded at the bottom of all frames, with punched holes for securing the frames to floor construction.

K. Frames shall not extend beneath finished floor. However, in areas where concrete topping occurs, the anchor clips at bottom of frames shall be adjustable type to permit securing to subfloor construction.

L. Rabbets and glazing stops on borrowed light frames shall be fabricated to provide a 3/4" minimum depth at fire-rated frames, and where detailed or noted on drawings in lieu of standard 5/8" depth.

M. Glazing stops shall be of design that will permit application of glazing sealant on each side of glass with a 1/8" clearance on each side.

N. Supports and anchors shall be fabricated from not less than 16-gauge sheet metal, unless otherwise specified. Galvanize after fabrication. Units to be built into exterior walls; comply with ASTM A153, Class A.

O. Inserts, bolts, and fasteners shall be manufacturer's standard units except hot-dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable.


Project # 4181220


03-27-2018

P. Frames shall be drilled or punched to receive silencers except where weatherstripping is required. Surface applied silencers are not acceptable. Frames shall be furnished with silencers equivalent to Glynn Johnson #GJ64 in accordance with the following:

1. Single interior doors - three at strike jamb.

2. Exterior doors not required.

Q. Frames that are to be fully grouted with mortar or in contact with concrete shall be back primed with asphaltic paint.

2.4 METAL DOORS

A. Doors shall be of designs and sizes as required by drawings and schedules.

B. Steel shall be 18-gauge for interior doors and 16-gauge galvanized steel for exterior doors.

C. Doors shall be of full flush construction with face sheets broken to form and meet at side edges. Side edges shall be continuously reinforced from top to bottom by steel channels or flat bars, placed immediately inside of and continuously welded to formed facing sheets.

D. Meeting stiles at pairs of doors and lock or latch edges at single doors shall be beveled 1/8" in two inches.

E. Top and bottom edge of door shall be reinforced with channels full width of door. Exterior doors shall be closed to the weather on top and bottom, with welded channels, top flush so as to drain moisture.

F. Core shall consist of manufacturer's standard urethane, bonded to face sheets and top caps at all exterior applications or as noted on the drawings. Core installation of internal stiffeners or unitized grid are also approved; however, doors shall be sound-deadened and exterior doors insulated.

G. Edge joints shall be continuously welded and ground smooth. Edge welds, face welds, and other construction welds and blemishes shall be filled with mineral filler or body putty and sanded, as necessary, to secure a flat, unblemished, finished appearance.

H. Clearance for doors shall be 1/8" maximum at jambs and heads and meeting stiles at pairs of doors, 3/4" maximum between bottom of door and finished floor, except where larger undercuts are scheduled or where thresholds require specific clearance. Undercut clearances greater than 3/4" will not be permitted at single label doors, and 3/8" at pair of label doors.

I. Cutouts for openings shall be as noted on the drawing with fixed stops welded to door assembly, and removable stops mitered and welded at corners and secured in-place with countersunk, oval-head machine screws.

2.5 HARDWARE PREPARATION

A. Hardware mortises and reinforcements shall be made from templates, furnished and shipped prepaid to hollow metal manufacturer by hardware suppliers. Where mortised hardware is required, provide proper mortised openings and reinforcing. Reinforcing shall be drilled and tapped. Surface applied hardware will be secured to built-up reinforcement, field drilled, and tapped. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115, "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware".

B. Minimum reinforcement shall be 9-gauge for butts, 12-gauge plus lock reinforcing unit for lock front and strike, 12-gauge channel at doors and plate at frame for closers, 14-gauge for other hardware, and metal reinforcement unit for locks as required by lock manufacturer.


Project # 4181220

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 08 1100-5

2.6 FINISHES

A. Clean and chemically treat metal surfaces to assure maximum paint adherence; follow with a dip or spray coat or rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer on all exposed surfaces. Prime coats shall be oven cured.

B. Doors shall have all depressions filled with a metallic putty prior to application of primer, and surfaces sanded to provide a smooth, flat finish.

C. Finish painting of doors and frames will be done at job site under Section 09 9000, Painting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed.

B. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's data, and as specified herein.

B. Placing Frames

1. Comply with the provisions of Standard 100 of the Steel Door Institute, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until perms are set.

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Final Adjustments

1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspections.

2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.

3. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.

B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible drying primer.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


03-27-2018


HIGH PERFORMANCE OVERHEAD COILING DOORS


08 3323-1

SECTION 08 3323


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. High performance overhead coiling rubber doors.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

2. Division 26 and 28 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for coiling door operators and access control devices.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. References: Refer to the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. National Electrical Manufacture’s Association (NEMA)

2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

B. National Electrical Manufacture’s Association (NEMA)

1. Type 4 - Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts.

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1. UL 508 Standard for Industrial Control Panels.

D. Door & Access Systems Manufacturers Association (DASMA)

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door.

B. Safety Device: A device that detects the presence of an object or person within a zone where injury could occur and provides a signal to stop the movement of the door.

C. High Performance Door: A powered door characterized by sliding action that is designed to sustain heavy usage at relatively high speeds.

D. High Speed Door: (subcategory of high performance doors) A non-swinging door used primarily to facilitate vehicular access or material transportation, with a minimum opening rate of 32 inches per second and a minimum closing rate of 24 inches per second.


Project # 4181220


08 3323-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Division 01 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: For each type of high performance overhead coiling door and accessory.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual sub-assemblies (side frames, header, control panel, motor), profiles for slats, and finishes.

2. Include operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Curtain fabric.

F. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's product information and applicable sustainability program credits that are available to contribute towards a LEED rated project certification.

1. Credit MR 4.1 and 4.2: Manufacturer's or fabricator's certificate indicating percentage of post-consumer recycled content by weight and pre-consumer recycled content by weight for each Product specified under this Section.

G. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals Including a detailed parts list for high performance overhead coiling doors in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 10 years of documented experience in manufacturing of doors and equipment of similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturer, with a minimum 3 years documented experience installing and maintenance of units similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door, frame, operator and sensor components specified in this Section from a single source, same manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.


Project # 4181220



08 3323-3


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on shop drawings.

B. Electrical: Verify actual job site power (voltage, phase and Hertz).

C. Verify environmental condition extremes.

D. Verify door sequence of operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of door openings and framing as required for high performance overhead coiling doors.

B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of high performance overhead coiling doors with connections to building power and access control system as applicable.

1. Fused disconnect required for each individual door within five feet of respective door (not supplied by door manufacturer).

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. High Performance Overhead Coiling Doors shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion.

C. Special Product Warranty: Manufacturer's warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components which fail to perform as follows:

1. 5-year / 1,000,000 Cycle Limited Warranty on Drive Motor and Gearbox.

2. 2-year / 300,000 Cycle Limited Warranty on all other Mechanical and Electrical Components.

3. Door Fabric:

a. Styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) door panels (curtains) will be free of defects in materials and workmanship for the LIFETIME of the door.

D. During the warranty period a factory-trained technician shall perform service and affect repairs. A safety inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or repair and a completed inspection form shall be submitted to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer: ASSA ABLOY Entrance Systems, 1550 N. Brown Rd, #145, Lawrenceville, GA 30043. Toll Free 1-800-ALBANY1. Web- www.assaabloyentrance.us Contact- [email protected]

http://www.assaabloyentrance.us/

mailto:[email protected]


Project # 4181220


08 3323-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures outlined in Division 1, Section, “Substitution Procedures”. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HIGH PERFORMANCE OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

A. Model: Albany UltraTough high-speed industrial door. (Basis of Design):

1. Overhead coiling door with rubber fabric curtain.

2. Overhead counterbalance system, motor and gearbox drive system.

3. Door side frames.

4. Control panel, activation devices, and safety sensor devices.

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Opening Speed:

1. Springless System: Door to operate at a speed up to 36 inches (914.4 mm) per second (size dependent).

2. Counterbalanced System: Door to operate at a speed up to 60 inches (1524 mm) per second (size dependent).

B. Operation Cycles: Drive motor and gearbox capable of operating for not less than 1,000,000 cycles. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

C. Wind Resistance:

1. Windlock and Guide System: Up to 20 lbf/sq. ft. (957.6 N/sq. mm.) equivalent to 88 mph (141.6 km/hr).

2. Wind Gussets: Up to 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436.4 N/sq. mm.) equivalent to 110 mph (177 km/hr).

2.4 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Door Curtain Design:

1. Door Fabric: 2 layers of Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) each 1/8” (0.8mm) thick, 60 durometer; sandwiched with 1-ply, 110lbs (50kg) polyester cord center.]

a. Complete with bonded SBR beveled continuous windlock on each side of panel, providing normal resiliency and flexibility at temperatures ranging from -40 °F to +180 °F (-40 C to +85 C).

b. Breaking strength 1100 lbs/in/ply.

2. Bottom Bar: Bottom bar shall extend the full width of the curtain, sufficient to maintain the bottom edge of the curtain parallel to the door threshold at all times.

a. The bottom bar shall be constructed of a steel angle and flat bar bolted together and shall have a breakaway center section to reduce risk of damage during accidental impacts and provide ease of straightening, allowing for simple re-assembly.

b. 6” tall weatherproof rubber loop made of EPDM able to seal uneven finished floors.

c. Door to be provided with wireless failsafe electric safety edge (see Safety Devices).


Project # 4181220



08 3323-5

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Frame assemblies constructed of steel members to form a slot of sufficient depth to allow the thicker edges of the rubber curtain windlock to move freely in the guides at all times. Steel members are to be of sufficient thickness and rigidity to maintain the windlock within the guides while enabling the windlock to break away during impact.

1. The windlock feature runs the full height of the door curtain and is contained in the side frames to secure the door under wind pressure and to decrease air infiltration.

2. Guides and frame shall be chemical and corrosion resistant painted finish.

3. Side frames covers shall be hinged to allow easy curtain access.

C. Door Header:

1. Top Roll System: Minimum 8 5/8 inches (219 mm) diameter, steel tube from 0.188 inches (4.75 mm) thick steel complying with ASTM A513.

a. Drum tube deflection shall not exceed 0.03 inches (0.762 mm) per foot (2.5 mm/m) of opening width.

b. Drive barrel shafts are constructed of minimum 2 inch (50.8 mm) diameter 1045 bolt-on steel shafts.

2. Idler: Fabric guiding barrel, constructed of minimum 4 inch (102 mm) O.D. round tubing with a minimum wall thickness of 0.134 inches (3.4 mm) and supported by minimum 1-1/2 inches (32 mm) diameter 1018 steel shafts.

3. Top Plates: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) hot-rolled steel with heavy-duty, self-aligning bearings with cast iron housings to support both the spring and idler barrels. 2 inch (50.8 mm) diameter shaft bearing shall be load-rated at 10800 lbf (48000 N) dynamic and 6400 lbf (28500 N) static. 1-1/2 inch (32 mm) diameter idler shaft bearing shall be load-rated at 8150 lbf (36000 N) dynamic and 4400 lbf (19600 N) static.

4. Counterbalance system: Torsion springs shall be connected by chain and sprocket to drive barrel with 100,000 cycle rated torsion springs.

D. Electric Door Operator: Reversible-type motor with controller for motor exposure indicated.

1. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, 20 or more cycles per hour and over 500 cycles per day.

2. Motor Exposure: Exterior and Interior use.

3. Side Mounted: Operator is mounted to the header assembly on the left or right side of door and connected to door drive shaft.

4. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Three phase.

b. Volts: 208 Volt.

c. Hertz: 50/60.

5. Operator: Up to 3.35 horsepower.

a. The motor and gearbox shall be designed for high cycle operation.

6. Drive System: Heavy-duty drive unit featuring a self-inhibiting worm gear.


Project # 4181220


08 3323-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

7. Emergency Manual Operation: Motor brake disengagement and chain hoist accessible from the ground level allowing manual opening and closing of the door during a power outage.

8. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

9. Timer: Each door to have automatic closing controlled by an adjustable hold open time delay.

2.5 CONTROL PANEL

A. PLC controller housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure.

1. Top and bottom limits to be adjustable from the drive.

2. Control panel shall include an adjustable, automatic closing timer, emergency stop, two actuating push buttons and a cycle counter.

3. Control Panel must have a rotary disconnect.

2.6 ACTIVATION DEVICES

A. General: Provide activation devices for condition of exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate activation and safety devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms.

2.7 NOTE: SELECT ACTIVATION DEVICES FROM THE OPTIONS BELOW

A. Pedestrian Type Activation Devices:

1. Three Push Button Switch: Button for open, button for close, button for stop.

B. Vehicular Type Activation Devices:

1. Radio Control Activation: Near proximity portable push button remote control programmable to individual doors or multiple doors in common.

a. One Button Remote Control.

C. SAFETY DEVICES

D. General: Provide safety devices for condition of exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate safety devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms.

E. Door to be provided with Albany Safety Light Curtain System.

1. Light curtain must be housed inside of the side jamb guide assembly and cover an area to a height of no less than six (6) feet.

2. Light curtain system must have a minimum of 40 infrared thru-beam optical sensors.

F. Door to be provided with failsafe electric safety edge. Door controller must indicate if the safety edge is not operable.

1. Connections between the safety edge and controller must be fully wireless. No coil cords allowed.

2. Bottom bar wireless system battery must be able to be replaced at ground level.


Project # 4181220



08 3323-7

2.8 DOOR FABRIC

A. Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR):

1. Black

B. Standard color black. Also available in tan SBR, blue, or grey EPDM or Black MSHA (specifications may vary). Temperature ranges of these fabrics are the same as SBR.

2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

1. Color: Orange.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install high performance overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Install high performance overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door.

C. Accessibility: Install high performance overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.


Project # 4181220


08 3323-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather-resistant.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door installation.

B. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess sealants, compounds, dirt and other substances. Repair damages finish to match original finish.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain high performance overhead coiling doors.

END OF SECTION


DOOR HARDWARE


08 7100-1

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Commercial door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled herein or on drawings, in quantities as required to complete project. Provide hardware that functions properly. Prior to furnishing hardware, advise Architect of items that will not operate properly, are improper for conditions, or will not remain permanently anchored.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish, color, and texture required for each type of door hardware indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 2-by-4-inch (51-by-102-mm) plate Samples of each type of finish required, except primed finish.

D. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer.

1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors complies with listed fire door assemblies.

E. Qualification Data: For Architectural Hardware Consultant.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks, latches and closers.

G. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

I. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame.


Project # 4181220

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.

3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer.

4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.

5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.

6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

7) Mounting locations for door hardware.

8) Door and frame sizes and materials.

9) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.

10) Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets.

11) Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.

3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.


Project # 4181220

DOOR HARDWARE Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 08 7100-3

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.

d. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:

1) Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products.

2. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

a. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

3. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

2.2 HINGES, GENERAL

A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

B. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:

1. Corners: Square

C. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.

2. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.3 HINGES

A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."

B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).

2. Hager Companies (HAG).

3. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).

4. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

2.4 PIVOTS AND PIVOT HINGES

A. Pivots: BHMA A156.4. Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."

B. Manufacturers:

1. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).

2. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

3. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).

2.5 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Standard: BHMA A156.26

1. Listed under Category N in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."

B. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves; joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hager Companies (HAG).

b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).

c. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).

d. Select Products Limited (SPL).


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 08 7100-5

2.6 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards."

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

C. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Cast.

a. Sargent MW design

b. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought

c. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

d. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated on Drawings or, if sets are provided by another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated.

D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw.

2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm) bolt throw.

E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.

3. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

4. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.

5. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.

2.7 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following:

1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13, Grade 1

1. Manufacturers:

a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).

b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

c. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).

2.8 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1

1. Manufacturers:

a. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

b. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).

c. Corbin Russwin

2.9 DOOR BOLTS

A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Half-Round Surface Bolts: Minimum 7/8-inch (22-mm) throw.

2. Interlocking Surface Bolts: Minimum 15/16-inch (24-mm) throw.

3. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw.

B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

C. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 is designed for mortising into door edge.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Door Controls International (DCI).

b. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).

c. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).

d. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

e. Rockwood

f. McKinney

D. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 designed for mortising into door edge.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Door Controls International (DCI).

b. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).

c. Hiawatha


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 08 7100-7

d. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

e. Rockwood

f. McKinney

2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30, Grade 1

1. Key Control Level: Category A

2. Destructive Test Level: Category A

3. Surreptitious Entry Resistance Level: Category A

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Six

2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.

3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.

a. High-Security Grade: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying with pick- and drill-resistant testing requirements in UL 437 (Suffix A).

C. Manufacturers: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.

1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR).

2. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT).

3. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).

2.11 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:

1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key.

B. Keys: Nickel Silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.

b. Quantity:

1) Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

2) Master Keys: Five.

3) Grand Master Keys: Five.

4) Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

2.12 OPERATING TRIM

A. Standard: BHMA A156.6 and as illustrated on Drawings.

B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).

2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).


4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

5. McKinney

2.13 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS

A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.

1. Material: Polished brass or bronze, with strike plate.

2.14 CLOSERS

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)", ANSI A117.1, and FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards."

1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.

B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width.

C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with fire alarm system.

D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

E. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers:


b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).

c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC).

d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 08 7100-9

F. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15.

1. Life-Safety Type: On release of hold open, door becomes self-closing. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system, loss of power.

2. Manufacturers:


b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).

c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC).

d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).

G. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.

2.15 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Size: 2” less than door width on push side and by height specified in door hardware sets.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws.

C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top, bottom and 2 sides; fabricated from the following material:

1. Material: 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).

b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).

c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

d. McKinney.

2.16 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.

B. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.

C. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15.

1. Coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for labeled fire door assemblies.

D. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch (16 by 19 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

E. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

F. Manufacturers:

1. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).

2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).


4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

2.17 DOOR GASKETING

A. Standard: BHMA A156.22.

B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.

D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.

E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the sill.

F. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.

G. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

H. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

I. Manufacturers:

1. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).

2. Reese Enterprises (RE).

3. Zero International (ZRO).


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 08 7100-11

2.18 THRESHOLDS

A. Standard: BHMA A156.21.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)", ANSI A117.1, and FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards."

1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).

2. Reese Enterprises (RE).

3. Zero International (ZRO).

2.19 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE

A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

b. McKinney

c. Ives

2.20 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:

a. Mortise hinges to doors.

b. Strike plates to frames.

c. Closers to doors and frames.

d. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is provided:

1) Surface hinges to doors.

2) Closers to doors and frames.

3) Surface-mounted exit devices.

4) Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

2.21 FINISHES

A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 08 7100-13

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

SET #HW1 – (exterior door)

3 Hinges TA2314 NRP 4-1/2”x4-1/2” US32D MK Mortise Lock 11 8225 LNL US26D SA

(Dormitory) Door Closer 351 PSH EN SA

(surface w/stop & holder) Protection Plate K1050 10" US32D RO Threshold 171A PE Gasketing 294AV PE Sweep 3452 CNB PE

Approved Manufacturers:

Hinges McKinney, Hager, Stanley Locks Sargent Manufacturing Closers Sargent Manufacturing Flatware, Flush Bolts & Stops Rockwood, McKinney, Hiawatha Threshold & Weatherstrip Pemko, McKinney, Zero

Manufacturer List: Code Name MK McKinney PE Pemko RO Rockwood SA Sargent

END OF SECTION


GLAZING


08 8000-1

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows.

2. Doors.

3. Interior borrowed lites.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.


Project # 4181220

GLAZING 08 8000-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements:

a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

1) Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph.

b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.

1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.

c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.

1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads.

2) For insulating glass.

d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.

2. Unit and for each lite.

3. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies:

a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200.

c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.


Project # 4181220

GLAZING Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 08 8000-3

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Samples: For each product, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.

E. Qualification Data: For installers.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar-control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.

D. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units."


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product specified.

4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 08 8000-5

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; Class I (Clear), unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; Class I (Clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind, and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.

4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass).

5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.

C. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide or -nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), and complying with other requirements specified.

D. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q-6; and of form and mesh pattern specified.

E. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated.

3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:

a. Manufacturer's standard sealants.

5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.

2. EPDM, ASTM C 864.

3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.

5. Any material indicated above.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.6 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units MG-1: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2. Provide at all borrowed lites located in non-fire rated interior partitions.

2.7 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS

A. Solar-Control Low-E Insulating-Glass Units IG-1:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon No. VE1-2M, with Solarscreen 2M Low-e or approved equivalent.

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1” overall; 1/4" each lite.

3. Interspace Content: Argon.

4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear).

a. Kind HS (heat strengthened).


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 08 8000-7

5. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.

a. Kind HS (heat strengthened).

6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.

7. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum.

8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum.

9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40 maximum.

10. Shading Coefficient: 0.40 percent minimum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system.

3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

E. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

F. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

G. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

H. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018 08 8000-9

I. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018


PAINTS AND COATINGS


09 9000-1

SECTION 09 9000

PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Extent of painting work is shown on drawings and schedules, with general criteria as herein specified in the finish classifications, and in accordance with the following:

1. The work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, as indicated. Painting of interior and exterior faces of new exposed structural steel is required.

2. Surface preparation, priming, and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.

3. Paint as used herein means coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data

1. Immediately following the award of contract, submit the name of paint manufacturer. In addition, provide such catalogs, color cards and other data required to select paint colors as a part of preparing the color schedule.

2. If use of other manufacturer's products is desired, submit for review a complete substitution list, including a side-by-side listing of specified products and technical name of the proposed product. Each product proposed shall be accompanied by manufacturer's specification sheets for evaluation.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers with labels intact and seals unbroken. Identify containers by manufacturer's name of product or specification number and color number or identification.

B. Store materials in a well-ventilated location assigned specifically for this purpose. Receiving, opening, and mixing of materials shall be done in this location.

C. Keep storage space clean and neat. Remove solvent or paint saturated rags and clothes after each day's work.

1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Exterior work shall not be performed until the ambient temperature is at least 50oF and shall not be done during periods of damp, dewy, foggy, rainy, frosty weather or when the relative humidity exceeds 85% unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not paint surfaces while exposed to hot sunlight.

B. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted or stained are enclosed and air is conditioned within the temperature and relative humidity limits specified by the paint manufacturer for application and drying periods.


Project # 4181220

PAINTS AND COATINGS 09 9000-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

C. Interior painting shall not be performed until the ambient temperature of the area in which the work occurs is at least 50° F. Application of clear sealers and varnish shall not be performed until the ambient temperature is at least 65° F.

D. Protect surfaces which are in close proximity of the area being painted or finished. Provide and place drop cloths or other suitable protective coverings as required for protection of surfaces. Clean, repair, and restore damaged and defaced surfaces to their original condition.

E. Examine the specifications for the various other trades and be familiar with the provisions pertaining to this work.

F. Review painting specifications thoroughly so as to have full knowledge and understanding of the products and materials specified, number of coats, and the surface to which the materials are to be applied. Employ techniques, tools, skilled mechanics, and accessories which will produce the intended results.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Materials shall be products of the following manufacturers or approved equivalent:

1. Sherwin-Williams Co.

2. PPG Industries (Pittsburgh Paints)

3. ICI Dulux/Devoe

4. Pratt & Lambert

5. Benjamin Moore

6. Diamond Vogel

7. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Provide materials as, or equivalent to those, listed hereinafter in the Schedule of Materials.

B. Provide products having a fire hazard classification rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread, 15 for fuel contributed, and 30 for smoke developed when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Certification attesting to this requirement will be required on each product or material used on this project.

C. All paint materials and equipment shall be compatible in use: Finish coats shall be compatible with prime coats; prime coats shall be compatible with the surface to be coated; all tools and equipment shall be compatible with the coating to be applied.

D. Thinners, when used, shall be only those thinners recommended for that purpose by the Manufacturer of the material to be thinned.

2.3 COLOR SELECTIONS

A. Selection of colors and glosses, except as specified, shall be by the Architect/Engineer.


Project # 4181220

PAINTS AND COATINGS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 09 9000-3

2.4 PAINT FINISH SCHEDULE

A. The omission of a substrate and product from the schedule shall not waive the requirement of this specification for painting and finishing. Upon notification of such omissions, the Architect/Engineer will furnish the specification for the substrate in question.

B. Painting required under this section is as called for on the drawings and as noted herein after in the Schedule of Finishes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through preparatory work as included in Article 3.02.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer of such conditions.

C. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable.

D. Commencement of work will constitute acceptance of suitability of Project conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. Protection

1. Prior to all surface preparation and paint operations, completely mask, remove, or otherwise adequately protect all hardware, accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in contact with painted surfaces but not scheduled to receive paint.

2. Ferrous Metal Surfaces

a. Thoroughly clean with solvents or wire brushing until free of dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants.

b. Surfaces to be painted, having coal tar, or asphaltic paint shall be completely cleaned of such coating by sand blasting or solvent washing.

3. Galvanized Metal Surfaces

a. Thoroughly clean with solvents or wire brushing until free of dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminates.

4. Other Metal Surfaces

a. Thoroughly clean with solvents or wire brushing until free of dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminates.

5. Gypsum Board

a. Clean dirt, dust, and foreign material from surface before priming.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General Requirements

1. Shop prime coats of manufactured items shall be applied by the manufacturer and/or fabricator.

2. Prime and finish coats for items specified with factory finishing shall be applied by the manufacturer of that item.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

3. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint manufacturer.

4. Apply paint, enamel, and varnish with suitable brushes, rollers, or spraying equipment.

a. Rate of application shall not exceed that as recommended by paint manufacturer for the surface involved.

b. Keep brushes, rollers, and spraying equipment clean, dry, and free from contaminates and suitable for the finish required.

c. Apply materials under adequate illumination, evenly spread and smoothly flowed on to avoid runs, sags, holidays, brushmarks, air bubbles, and excessive roller stipple.

d. Painting and finishing shall be completed prior to installation of electrical device cover plates.

e. Comply with recommendation of product manufacturer for drying time between succeeding coats.

f. Vary slightly the color of successive coats.

g. Enamel or varnish finish applied to wood or metal shall be sanded with fine sandpaper and then cleaned between coats to produce an even, smooth finish.

h. Buff penetrating sealer and oil type finishes after each coat.

i. Where materials which hold glass are to be painted, paint finish coats after glazing, carrying paint over glazing material and to the glass in a neat straight line.

j. Paint aluminum housings of weatherstripping and sill strips at hollow metal doors to match doors and frames.

k. Number of coats

1) The number of coats required are indicated on Paint Finish Schedules. The coats as scheduled are field applied coats and are supplemental to shop coats.

2) Provide complete coverage and hide. When color, stain, dirt, or undercoats show through final coat of paint, provide additional coats, at no additional cost, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.

l. Inspection

1) Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected.

2) Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats applied.


Project # 4181220

PAINTS AND COATINGS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 09 9000-5

3.4 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS (BASED ON ICI DULUX/DEVOE COATINGS)

A. Exterior Use Dry Film Thickness

Per Coat

Metals, Ferrous 1st: 4160 Devguard Tank & Structural Primer 2.0 2nd & 3rd: 4308 Devguard Industrial Enamel 2.0

B. Interior Use Dry Film Thickness

Per Coat

Metal Surfaces 1st: 4120 Devguard All-Purpose Metal Primer

(Omit where pre-primed) 1.5

2nd & 3rd: 1512 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Eggshell Enamel

2.0

Galvanized Metal 1st: 4120 Devguard All-Purpose Metal Primer 1.5 2nd & 3rd: 4308 Devguard Industrial Enamel 2.0 Gypsum Wallboard - Epoxy 1st: 1060 Ultra-Hide Vapor Barrier Primer 1.5 2nd & 3rd: 4508 Tru-Glaze Epoxy Coating 3.0 - 5.0 or 2nd & 3rd: 4406 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterbase

Epoxy Semi-Gloss 2.0 – 5.0

or 2nd & 3rd: 4406 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterbase

Epoxy Gloss 2.0 – 5.0

Concrete Block - Epoxy 1st: 4000 Bloxfil Int/Ext Heavy Duty Block Filler 7.0 – 14.5 2nd & 3rd: 4406 Tru-Glaze-WB Epoxy Semi-Gloss 2.0 – 5.0 or 2nd & 3rd: 4408 Tru-Glaze-WB Epoxy Gloss 2.0 – 5.0

3.5 REINSTALLATION OF REMOVED ITEMS

A. Reinstallation of removed items

1. Following completion of painting in each space, promptly reinstall all items removed for painting.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Touch up and restore finish where damaged.

B. Remove spilled, splashed, or splattered paint from all surfaces.

C. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned.

D. Leave storage space clean and in condition required for equivalent spaces in project.


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

E. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by others and leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION


SIGNAGE


10 1400-1

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Room and door signs.

B. Emergency evacuation maps.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

D. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors.

1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule.

2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Metro Waste Authority through Architect/Engineer at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule.

3. Submit for approval by Metro Waste Authority through Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Metro Waste Authority's use in maintenance of project.

1. Curved Sign Media Suction Cups: One for each 100 signs; for removing media.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.

B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.

C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.


Project # 4181220

SIGNAGE 10 1400-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.

1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified.

2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) and Grade II braille.

3. Character Height: 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Sign Height: 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

5. Emergency Evacuation Maps:

a. Allow for one map floor.

b. Use clear plastic panel silk-screened on reverse, in brushed aluminum frame, screw-mounted.

2.2 SIGN TYPES

A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.

1. Edges: Square.

2. Corners: Square.

3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.

B. Radius / Curved Signs: One-piece, curved extruded aluminum media holder securing flat, flexible sign media by curved lip on two sides; other two sides closed by end caps; concealed mounting attachment.

1. Sizes: As indicated on the drawings.

2. Finish: Natural (clear) anodized.

3. Sign Orientation: Curved in horizontal section.

4. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Mechanical anchorage, with predrilled holes, and set in clear silicone sealant.


Project # 4181220

SIGNAGE Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 10 1400-3

C. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:

1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.

2. Character Case: Upper case only.

3. Background Color: Clear.

4. Character Color: Contrasting color.

2.3 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA

A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color:

1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

2.4 NON-TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA

A. Silk Screened Plastic Panels: Letters and graphics silk screened onto reverse side of plastic surface:

1. Sign Color: Clear.

2. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.

C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches (1525 mm) above finished floor.

2. If no location is indicated obtain Metro Waste Authority's instructions.

D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220

SIGNAGE 10 1400-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


10 4416-1

SECTION 10 4416

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Remaining paragraphs are defined in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" as "Informational Submittals." Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.


Project # 4181220

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Amerex Corporation.

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.

c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.

f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.

g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.

h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

i. Moon-American.

j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.

k. Potter Roemer LLC.

l. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: 20-A:120-B:C, 20-lb (9.1-kg) nominal capacity, with mono-ammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide brackets from same manufacturers as extinguisher.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Horizontal.


Project # 4181220

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 10 4416-3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT


11 1300-1

SECTION 11 1300

LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Dock shelters/seals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Operating Range: Maximum amount of travel above and below the loading dock level.

B. Working Range: Recommended amount of travel above and below the loading dock level for which loading and unloading operations can take place.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, accessories, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of dock seal and shelter fabric indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For dock shelters, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Qualification Data: Five years’ experience for the Installer.

F. Maintenance Data: For loading dock equipment to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store and handle dock shelters in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to fabric or frame.

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage.


Project # 4181220

LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11 1300-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish recessed pit dimensions, slopes of driveways, and heights of loading docks and proceed with fabricating loading dock equipment without field measurements. Coordinate loading dock construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for loading dock equipment. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Dock Levelers: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace dock-leveler components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


2. Structural failures including cracked or broken structural support members and load-bearing welds.

3. Warranty Period for Structural Assembly: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

4. 3.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of loading dock equipment Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper equipment operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.

2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

MWA P-56 - Metro Central Transfer Station (MCYS) Tarping Area Enclosure

Project # 4181220

LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 11 1300-3

3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each type of loading dock equipment is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from steel plate complying with ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 55 (380).

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed.

D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

E. Wood: DOC PS 20 dimension lumber, select structural grade, kiln dried.

F. Pressure-Treated Wood: DOC PS 20 dimension lumber, select structural grade, kiln dried, and pressure treated with waterborne preservatives to comply with AWPA C2.

2.3 FRAME-TYPE DOCK SHELTER

A. General: Dock shelters designed to form a seal with sides and top of truck body while leaving entire width and height of truck's rear opening unobstructed; of type, size, and construction indicated.

1. Product: Hugger CS100 series by Hugger Dock Equipment Company:

2. Seal at trailer hinge gap.

3. Foam frame design.

4. Poly-wrapped side frames.

5. Pivoting canopy head.

6. Detachable side curtains.

7. 40 oz. vinyl fabric.

8. Heat resistive technology.

2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish loading dock equipment after assembly and testing.

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M for iron and steel loading dock equipment.

2. ASTM A 153/A 153M for iron and steel hardware for loading dock equipment.


Project # 4181220

LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11 1300-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of loading dock equipment.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems for loading dock equipment to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls for suitable conditions.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate size and location of dock shelter indicated to be attached frame of wall.

B. Clean recessed dock shelter and area of pre-installation debris.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install loading dock equipment as required for a complete installation.

B. Dock Shelters: Attach dock shelter securely to building structure in proper relation to openings and insure proper clearances.


A. Adjust loading dock equipment for proper, safe, efficient operation.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain loading dock equipment.

3.6 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. All elevated loading dock doors:

END OF SECTION


METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS


13 3419-1

SECTION 13 3419

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufacturer-engineered, shop-fabricated structural steel building frame.

B. Insulated Metal wall and roof panels including soffits, gutters and downspouts, and roof mounted equipment curbs.

C. Exterior doors.


A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.


A. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

D. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2014.

E. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality; 2014.

F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

G. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2014.

H. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

I. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.

J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015.

K. IAS AC472 - Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems; 2017.

L. MBMA (MBSM) - Metal Building Systems Manual; 2012.

M. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004).

1.4 SUBMITTALS










http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20A2.4


http://www.iasonline.org/

http://www.mbma.com/



Project # 4181220

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 3419-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

B. Product Data: Provide data on profiles, component dimensions, fasteners.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly dimensions, locations of structural members, connections; wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage, installation; framing anchor bolt settings, sizes, and locations from datum, foundation loads; indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols; indicate net weld lengths; provide professional seal and signature.

D. Erection Drawings: Indicate members by label, assembly sequence, and temporary erection bracing.

E. Manufacturer Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing metal building manufacturer is accredited under IAS AC472.

1. Include statement that manufacturer designs and fabricates metal building system as integrated components and assemblies, including but not limited to primary structural members, secondary members, joints, roof, and wall cladding components specifically designed to support and transfer loads and properly assembled components form a complete or partial building shell.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed components and utilities.


A. Design structural components, develop shop drawings, and perform shop and site work under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work.

1. Design Engineer Qualifications: Licensed in Iowa.

2. Conform to applicable code for submission of design calculations as required for acquiring permits.

3. Cooperate with regulatory agency or authority and provide data as requested.

B. Perform work in accordance with AISC 360 and MBMA (MBSM).

C. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of products similar to those required for this project.

1. Not less than 3 years of documented experience

2. Accredited by IAS in accordance with IAS AC472.

E. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty for finishes and panels.

1. Include coverage for exterior pre-finished surfaces to cover pre-finished color coat against chipping, cracking or crazing, blistering, peeling, chalking, or fading. Include coverage for weather tightness of building enclosure elements after installation.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20A2.4





Project # 4181220

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 13 3419-3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Buildings:

1. Butler Manufacturing Company: www.butlermfg.com.

2. Ceco Building Systems: www.cecobuildings.com.

3. Chief Buildings: www.chiefbuildings.com/sle.

4. Nucor Building Systems: www.nucorbuildingsystems.com.

5. VP Buildings: www.vp.com.

6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 METAL BUILDING

A. Single span rigid frame.

B. Primary Framing: Rigid frame of rafter beams and columns, braced end frames, and wind bracing.

C. Secondary Framing: Purlins and Girts, and other items detailed.

D. Wall System: Preformed metal panels of horizontal profile, with sub-girt framing/anchorage assembly, and accessory components.

E. Roof System: Preformed metal panels oriented parallel to slope, with sub-girt framing/anchorage assembly, and accessory components.

2.3 MATERIALS - FRAMING

A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.

D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1; galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.

E. Welding Materials: Type required for materials being welded.

F. Primer: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.

G. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; Non-shrink; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch (13.7 MPa).

2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch (48 MPa).

2.4 MATERIALS - WALLS AND ROOF

A. Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, Designation SS (structural steel), Grade 33 (230), with G90/Z275 coating.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, galvanized to comply with requirements of ASTM A153/A153M, finish to match adjacent surfaces when exterior exposed.






Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

C. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard type.

D. Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, Flashings, Gutters, Downspouts, Rain Water Diverter, Fascias, and Infills: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS

A. Doors and Frames: Specified in Section 08 1113.

2.6 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Design members to withstand dead load, applicable snow load, and design loads due to pressure and suction of wind calculated in accordance with applicable code.

B. Exterior wall and roof system shall withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection of 1/90 of span.

C. Provide drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within wall or roof system.

D. Size and fabricate wall and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

2.7 FABRICATION - FRAMING

A. Fabricate members in accordance with AISC 360 for plate, bar, tube, or rolled structural shapes.

B. Anchor Bolts: Formed with straight shank, assembled with template for casting into concrete.

C. Provide wall opening framing for doors, windows, and other accessory components.

2.8 FABRICATION - WALL AND ROOF PANELS

A. Siding & Roofing Panels: Per metal wall and roof panel specifications.

B. Girts/Purlins: Rolled formed structural shape to receive siding, roofing sheet.

C. Fasteners: To maintain load requirements and weather tight installation, same finish as cladding, non-corrosive type.

2.9 FABRICATION - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Fabricate of same material and finish as roofing metal.

B. Form sections in maximum possible lengths. Hem exposed edges. Allow for expansion at joints.

C. Fabricate support straps of same material and finish as roofing metal, color as selected.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Framing Members: Clean, prepare, and shop prime. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded.



Project # 4181220

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 13 3419-5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and placed anchors are in correct position

3.2 ERECTION - FRAMING

A. Erect framing in accordance with AISC 360.

B. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Locate braced bays as indicated.

C. Set column base plates with non-shrink grout to achieve full plate bearing.

D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval.

E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed.

3.3 ERECTION - WALL AND ROOF PANELS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface.

C. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb.

D. Locate end laps over supports. End laps minimum 2 inches (50 mm). Place side laps over bearing.

E. Provide expansion joints where indicated.

F. Install sealant and gaskets, providing weather tight installation.

3.4 ERECTION - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Rigidly support and secure components. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts.

B. Slope gutters minimum 1/8 inch/ft.

C. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from level; 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plumb.

B. Siding and Roofing: 1/8 inch (3 mm) from true position.

END OF SECTION



Project # 4181220


04-05-2018


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING


22 0500-1

SECTION 22 0500


PART 1 GENERAL


A. The work shall include the furnishings of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division and as called for on the Plumbing Drawings to include supervision, quality control, operation, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete plumbing installation. The work shall also include the furnishing of necessary hoisting facilities to set materials and equipment in place and the furnishing of any scaffolding and transportation associated with this work.

B. Examine the project site and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect the work. Review the drawings and specifications of other trades and take note of conditions to be created which will affect the work. All conditions shall be considered in the preparation of bids; no additional compensation will be made on the behalf of this Contractor.

C. Provide labor necessary to demolish the existing plumbing systems as shown on the drawings, as described in Part 3.1, Existing Conditions, or as required.

D. Where noted on the drawings or where called for in other sections of the specification, the Contractor for this division shall install equipment furnished by others, and shall make required service connections. Verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. This contractor shall be responsible for the removal and installation of railings, piping, ductwork, louvers, etc. as required to install new equipment.

1.2 DAMAGE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the work of other trades, or to the building and its contents, caused by equipment installation.

1.3 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Obtain and furnish necessary permits and inspection certificates for material and labor furnished. Permits and certificates shall be obtained from the proper inspection authorities. The cost of permits, certificates and fees required in connection with the installation shall be borne by the Contractor, unless otherwise noted in the detailed contractual description preceding these specifications. Where applications are required for the procuring of utility services to the building, see that such application is properly filed with the utility, and that information required for such an application is presented to the extent and in the form required by the utility company.

1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.


Project # 4181220


22 0500-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

B. Applicable provisions of the following codes and standards are hereby imposed on a general basis for the mechanical work in addition to specific applications specified by individual work sections of these specifications.

1. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

2. IECC - International Energy Conservation Code

3. ANSI Pressure Piping Standards (B31)

4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and State Boiler Code

5. AWS Standards for Welding

6. NFPA/NEC 70 - National Electrical Code

7. Local and/or State Plumbing, Mechanical and Building Codes

8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

9. Uniform Plumbing Code

10. International Mechanical Code

11. NFPA Codes and Standards

C. If any work indicated on the drawings or specified herein conflicts in any way with any of the rules and regulations of the above Authorities, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and do so no less than 72 hours before bids are opened. In the event the Contractor fails to notify the Architect/Engineer and changes are required by said conflicts, the Contractor shall make such changes as are required without additional cost to this Owner.

D. Installations must be safe in every respect, and must not create a condition which will be harmful to building occupants; to operating, installing or testing personnel; to workmen; or to the public. The contractor for each installation shall be solely responsible for providing installations which will meet these conditions. If the Contractor believes that the installation will not be safe for all parties, report these beliefs in writing to the Architect/Engineer before any equipment is purchased or work is installed, giving recommendations. The Architect/Engineer will work out required changes and adjustments in contract price where adjustments are warranted.

1.5 DRAWINGS

A. A complete set of current up-to-date Project Drawings and Specifications shall be kept on the site at all times. Prior to installing any of the work, check the drawings for dimensions and see that the work does not interfere with clearance required for ceilings, beams, foundations, finished columns, pilasters, partitions and electrical equipment as shown on the drawings and details. After work is installed and it develops that interferences occur which have not been called to the Architect/Engineer's attention before the installation, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make such changes in his work as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

B. The contract drawings for plumbing work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement, the Contractor shall make such changes as directed by the Architect/Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner.


Project # 4181220



22 0500-3

C. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be shown; but where such items are required by other sections of these specifications or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. Rough-in dimensions and locations shall be verified with the supplier of equipment furnished by other trades, or by the Owner, prior to the time of roughing-in.

D. Equipment specification may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified, or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such items are required, they shall be included by the supplier of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for.

E. The drawings and the specifications are cooperative and supplementary. It is the intent of both said drawings and specifications to cover all mechanical requirements in their entirety as nearly as possible. The Contractor shall closely check the drawings and specifications for any obvious errors or omissions and bring any such condition to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to the receipt of bids, in order to permit clarification by means of a mailed Addendum. If there is no question prior to the bid proposal date, the Architect/Engineer shall assume that the drawings and specifications are complete and correct and will expect the intent of said documents to be complied with, and the installation to be complete in all respects, according to said intent.

F. Locate equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Minor deviations from the contract drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility, but changes of magnitude, or which involve extra cost, shall not be made without prior approval. Ample space shall be allowed for removal of parts that may require replacement or service in the future.

G. All valves, pumps, etc. shall be accessible for maintenance purposes. Locate items carefully and coordinate with other trades so that each valve and piece of equipment is accessible and functional. Items located above a non-accessible ceiling, chase, or soffit shall be accessible through an access door. Coordinate location of access doors with the general contractor.

1.6 RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor's responsibility shall not end with the installation and connecting of the various apparatus. It shall include the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together with the qualified journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including equipment and materials furnished by other trades or by the Owner, until such time as the entire plumbing installation functions properly in every detail.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with other trades prior to installation.

B. No piping or equipment, which is foreign to the electrical equipment, or architectural appurtenances shall be run over the top of any electrical panels or electrical equipment, in accordance with NEC 110.26. This does not prohibit sprinkler protection for the installation.

C. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid, but where discrepancies arise, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the required quantity.


Project # 4181220


22 0500-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

D. Where the specifications state that equipment shall be furnished, installed or provided, it shall be understood to mean this Contractor shall furnish and install completely, unless it is specifically stated that the equipment is to be furnished and installed by others.

E. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between the piping and equipment of the various contractors. Conflicts between the drawings and specifications, or between requirements set forth for the various trades, shall be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required, and that the Contractor has submitted his bid in conformance with plans and specifications as issued and that no interference exists.

1.8 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE

A. Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed to be free from defects and to be new equipment; no secondhand, used or salvaged equipment will be allowed.

B. Keep the entire portion of the work in repair, without additional cost to the Owner, so far as defects in workmanship, apparatus, material or construction are concerned for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, except as otherwise specified herein.

C. Equipment which fails to meet performance ratings as specified and shown on the drawings shall be removed and replaced by new equipment that meets the specified requirements, without additional cost to the Owner.

D. Materials and workmanship shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, in whose presence various tests shall be made as required by these specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and catalog data for plumbing equipment as called for in Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. Submittal data for plumbing equipment shall consist of shop drawings and/or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the material or equipment to include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance curves, rating, and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating characteristics. Shop drawings shall be submitted on equipment and materials as required by the specifications.

C. Approval of materials, including alternate or substitute items, shall be obtained in writing from the Architect/Engineer, verbal approval will not be considered binding.

D. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall have been signed, checked, approved, and initialed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and will in so doing assume that the shop drawings conform to specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawing by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with elements of the specification. The name of the job, Architect/Engineer, location, and specification section shall appear on all pages of shop drawings. Equipment marks (such as S-1, WH-1) shall be indicated for each item.

E. Near completion of project, before conducting Owner orientation and training sessions and before authorization of final payment, submit to the Owner or their designated Representative for review: three (3) sets of installation and operational information, parts lists, and maintenance instructional manuals. These OMMs shall be organized, formatted and bound in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.


Project # 4181220



22 0500-5

F. At the completion of the project, prepare and submit to the Owner record drawings showing the location of piping and valves. Drawing shall give accurate dimensions of such equipment for future use by the Owner. This drawing shall be submitted as soon as work is completed and before authorization of final payment.

2.2 SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIALS

A. Submit to the Architect/Engineer for review, when requested, a list of subcontractors, materials and equipment proposed to be used. The list must be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer before this Contractor may enter into any subcontractual agreement. Equipment, materials, and devices, etc. shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, whether or not said items are herein specified.

2.3 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials shall be new, complete with manufacturer's guarantee or warranty, and shall be as listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc., American Water Works Association (AWWA), American Gas Association (AGA), etc., if a standard has been established by that agency for the type of material.

B. Materials shall also comply with applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, National Board of Fire Underwriters, National Fire Protection Association, National Safety Council, National Bureau of Standards, the National Electrical Code and the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. Such standards are hereby made a part of these specifications.

C. Work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner, and shall present a neat mechanical appearance when completed. Align, level and adjust equipment for satisfactory operation, and install so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily and so that parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation and maintenance. Methods and techniques of installation shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer.

D. Materials shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product. Materials of the same type of class shall be the products of one manufacturer. For example, faucets shall be from the same manufacturer.

E. Materials shall be protected from damage, and stored indoors or protected from the weather at all times, unless other storage arrangements are approved by the Architect/Engineer.

F. Bearing lubrication fittings shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be extended, where necessary, to an accessible location.

G. Material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2.4 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Proposals as submitted shall be based on the products specifically named in the specification or on the drawings. Material or equipment by manufacturers other than those specified may be used only by permission of the Architect/Engineer. Such permission for substitution must be requested, in writing and in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

B. The Architect/Engineer reserves the sole right for the approval of proposed material or equipment, and the phrase, "or approved equivalent", used in these specifications, or on the drawings, shall be interpreted to mean an equivalent approved by the Architect/Engineer.


Project # 4181220


22 0500-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. Changes required by alternate equipment shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner; and costs incurred by other trades, public utilities or the Owner, as a result of the use of such equipment, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Furnish to the Architect/Engineer, when requested, samples of proposed material or equipment substitutions. These samples shall remain with the Architect/Engineer as long as needed.

E. Identify the differences in alternate material or equipment as compared to that specified, and indicate the benefits to the project as a result of selecting the alternative.

F. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse approval of equipment which does not meet the specification, in their opinion, or of equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. The Architect/Engineer further reserves the right to reject equipment for which maintenance service and the availability of replacement parts is questionable.

2.5 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

1) AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

5. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.


Project # 4181220



22 0500-7

2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.

c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.

d. JCM Industries.

e. Smith-Blair, Inc.

f. Viking Johnson.

1) Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

2) Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.

3) Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

2. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC, PVC, or PVC and CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Eslon Thermoplastics.

3. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


1) Thompson Plastics, Inc.

4. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC, PVC, or CPVC AND PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.


1) NIBCO INC.

2) NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.

5. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground, Aboveground, or Underground and Aboveground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.


1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.


Project # 4181220


22 0500-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

2) Fernco, Inc.

3) Mission Rubber Company.

4) Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Eclipse, Inc.

d. Epco Sales, Inc.

e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.

f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

2.8 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Examine the existing buildings and grounds or site and become familiar with the conditions as they exist, or that will in any manner affect the work under this contract. No allowance will be made subsequently, in this connection, on behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence by the Contractor.

B. Existing equipment, such as duct or pipe, in or on the existing building and grounds which is to be replaced, or which interferes in any way with the remodeling of the existing facilities and/or installation of new equipment, shall be removed from the premises or relocated by this Contractor, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Do not remove from the premises any equipment that may have maintenance value to the Owner without permission of the Owner. Equipment, duct or pipe not to be reused shall be removed from the premises, unless otherwise noted herein or shown on the drawings.


Project # 4181220



22 0500-9

C. Where existing equipment is removed or changed, all piping no longer in service shall be removed and stubs plugged as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Building surfaces damaged and openings left by removal of equipment shall be repaired by the proper trades and paid for by this Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The cutting and fitting shall be done by this Contractor. The cutting of floor, ceiling or wall surfaces shall be done by this Contractor with extreme care, in order to avoid any disrupting or damage of existing utility services which may be encountered. Coordinate with other trades and with the General Contractor or Construction Manager to minimize the damage to the building in order to reduce the amount of patching required.

D. Where new openings are cut and concealed piping is encountered, such items shall be removed or relocated as required. Where systems to be removed stub through floors, walls or ceilings, openings shall be patched so that no evidence of the former installation remains.

E. Existing active services (water, gas, sewer, electric), when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. If active services are encountered which require relocation, make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the utility or municipality having jurisdiction.

F. The location, size and elevation of underground utilities shown on the drawings are in accordance with data supplied by the Owner and/or the various utility companies. The Contractor shall verify this data and shall report any discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer, in writing, before submitting his bid.

3.2 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE

A. Changes in service shall be made so as to provide a minimum of interference with the operation of services in the building. When changes require shutdown of building services, notify the proper building authorities no less than 48 hours in advance and obtain approval from these authorities before making changes. Such notices shall give duration and nature of shutdown. Temporary arrangements shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner.

B. Any and all interruptions to building services shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.

3.3 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping at indicated slopes.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.


Project # 4181220


22 0500-10 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3.4 OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING

A. The General Contractor shall coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure, as required for the installation of the plumbing work.

B. Furnish to the General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings. This shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional patching is required due to this Contractor's failure to inspect this work, this Contractor shall make arrangements for the patching required to properly close the opening, to include patch painting. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect.

C. When cutting and patching of the structure is made necessary due to this Contractor's failure to install piping, sleeves or equipment on schedule, or due to this Contractor's failure to furnish, on schedule, the information required for the leaving of openings, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements for this cutting and patching. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect.

3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. See Division 31 - Trenching and Backfilling for requirements for trench excavation, backfill, and compaction.

B. Contractor shall coordinate all related activity with General Contractor at least 24 hours before beginning construction activity.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for erecting and monitoring of all safety barricades and related protection around excavation and work areas.

D. Trenches and excavations may be backfilled by the Contractor only after required testing has been satisfactorily performed and locations of connections and appurtenances which will be concealed have been recorded by the Contractor in the construction record documents.

3.6 CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORK

A. Concrete work included herein or shown on the drawings shall be in conformance with Division 3 - Concrete.

B. Concrete work included herein or shown on the drawings shall be done only by experienced cement finishers. Brickwork, where included, shall be laid only by experienced brick masons. Brick shall be of uniform size, hard burned, and shall be laid in cement mortar, except for patch work at a location where cement and lime mortar has previously been used. Exposed, finish brickwork shall match existing brickwork as closely as practical and shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and Owner.

C. Concrete bases and pads for mechanical equipment will be furnished by General Contractor. This Contractor shall coordinate size and location.

D. Locate, furnish and install all support, hanger and equipment anchor bolts and related hardware.


Project # 4181220



22 0500-11

3.7 PAINTING

A. The finish of any item that has been marred, scratched or damaged in any way by this Contractor shall be repainted at the expense of this Contractor, and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner.

B. Painting and finishing of exposed mechanical systems including piping and duct shall be as shown on the drawings and per Division 9 - Finishes.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Keep the premises clean of all dirt and debris, caused by the work in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Keep the premises clean of all debris caused by the work at all times, and keep materials stored, in areas designated by the Owner, in such a manner as not to interfere with the progress of the work of other Contractors or with the operation of existing facilities.

C. At the conclusion of the construction, the site shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rubble, debris and unused material and shall be left in good order. Closed off spaces shall be cleaned of waste such as material, cartons, and wood frame members used in the construction.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Special steps shall be taken as necessary for the protection of equipment and materials furnished under Division 22. Equipment and materials shall be protected by Contractor from any physical damage due to weather elements, dirt, dents, sheet rock installation, and painting until the project is completed. Damage, if incurred, shall be promptly repaired at no additional cost to Owner, as-needed to restore equipment and materials to original as-new condition.

B. Protection of equipment during the finishing (sheet rock, plastering and painting) of the building interior shall be the responsibility of the contractor or contractors performing that work. This shall not relieve this Division 22 Contractor of the ultimate responsibility of checking and ensuring that adequate protection is provided and maintained at all times.

C. Where the installation or connection of equipment requires Division 22 Contractor to work in areas previously finished by other Contractors, the Division 22 Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that such finished areas are adequately protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of their said work. If damage occurs this Division 22 Contractor shall be responsible to arrange for the other Contractors to repair and refinish any damaged areas and shall pay for all repair, rework and refinishing required.

D. When heavy materials must be placed upon or transported over the roof deck, sheeting shall be placed to distribute the weight and support such materials. Any damage shall be immediately corrected at no cost to the Owner.

3.10 ASBESTOS IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL

A. In the event that suspected asbestos containing material (ACM) is encountered during the course of the work, cease operations in the immediate area and promptly notify both the Owner and Architect/Engineer. Suspected materials will then be sampled and analyzed by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Should ACM be confirmed, the Owner's Representative shall direct the abatement procedures. This work shall be awarded either by subcontract to the Contractor or under a separate contract.


Project # 4181220


22 0500-12 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. During abatement operations, cease operations in the immediate area of the abatement. Operations in other areas of the project may be performed, but care must be taken to control dust to avoid contamination of air monitoring samples. The Contractors shall coordinate activities with the asbestos abatement contractor as well as the Owner’s Representative.

D. Should no ACM be identified, operations in the restricted areas may be resumed. At the discretion of the Owner or Owner’s representative, any schedule delays caused by identification, analysis or abatement may be added in the form of an extension of time to the contract via a Change Order.

3.11 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS

A. Systems shall be tested and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to the Owner.

B. Prior to acceptance of the plumbing installation, demonstrate to the Owner or his designated representatives essential features and functions of all systems installed, and instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems.

C. Furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions, and arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives for the system present to assist with the demonstrations. The Owner and Contractor shall each sign a certification stating that the training has been performed and the Owner accepts same.

END OF SECTION


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT Project # 4181220 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 22 0529-1

SECTION 22 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide equipment, materials, labor and supervision necessary to install pipe hangers and supports.

B. Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction.

C. Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members.

D. Where concrete inserts are to be used, it shall be this Contractor’s responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms.


A. American National Standards Institute, ANSI:

1. ANSI B31.1 Power Piping

2. ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping

B. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, MSS, 1815 North Fort Myer Drive, Arlington, VA 22209.

1. MSS SP-58: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

2. MSS SP-69: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

C. Anvil International, 2 Holland Way, Exeter, NH 03833, www.anvilintl.com, (603) 418-2800.

1. Pipe Hangers and Supports Catalog (Jan. 2015)

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe Hanger: A device normally suspended from structure and is used to carry the piping weight in tension.

B. Pipe Support: A device by which piping is normally carried from beneath and is used to carry the piping weight in compression.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s product data on all hangers and support devices. Product data to include, but not be limited to materials, finishes, approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers and support devices shall be Anvil International Inc., Tolco, Fee and Mason, Michigan, B-Line or Engineer approved equivalent. Figure numbers within are based on Anvil International, Inc..


Project # 4181220


22 0529-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Hanger rods for steel, wrought iron and brass pipe shall be installed in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3 and 4 and the following schedule:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing

Up to 1 1/4" 3/8" 7'-0"

1 1/2" and 2" 3/8" 9'-0"

2" 3/8" 10'-0"

2 1/2", 3", and 3 1/2" 1/2" 10'-0"

4" and 5" 5/8" 12'-0"

6" 3/4" 12'-0"

8" 7/8" 14'-0"

10" and 12" 7/8" 16'-0"

14" and 16" 1" 16'-0"

18" 1 1/8" 18'-0"

20" and 24" 1 1/4" 20'-0"

B. Hanger rods for copper pipe and tube shall be installed in accordance with MSS-SP-69 Tables 3 and 4 and the following schedule:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing

1/2" and 3/4" 3/8" 5'-0"

1" 3/8" 6'-0"

1 1/4" 3/8" 7'-0"

1 1/2" 3/8" 8'-0"

2" 3/8" 8'-0"

2 1/2" 1/2" 9'-0"

3", 3 1/2", and 4" 1/2" 10'-0"

5" 1/2" 13'-0"

6" 5/8" 14'-0"

8" 3/4" 16'-0"

C. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe with two hangers for each pipe length. Locate hangers close to couplings.

D. In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves and strainers.

E. Where more than one pipe is to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Trapeze bar angles and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size to support the particular group of pipes. Trapeze hanger spacing shall be based on the smallest pipe on the rack. When hanging from light gauge metal trusses, coordinate pipe hanger spacing and hanger rod connection points with the truss manufacturer.

F. For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls, use welded steel brackets: Fig. 194 for loads up to 750 lbs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 1500 lbs; Fig. 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs.


Project # 4181220

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 22 0529-3

G. Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use “Unistrut” pipe racks or 12 gauge steel strut channel, 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" minimum.

1. Mount pipes to strut channel with two-piece pipe straps to match outside diameter of pipe including insulation.

H. Attach all pipe hangers from support rods using double locknuts tightened to prevent loosening.

3.2 INSTALLATION - VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Support vertical steel, wrought iron, copper and brass pipe at every other floor line.

B. Support vertical cast iron soil pipe at every floor line.

C. In addition to the above, support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting set on concrete or brick pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection close to riser.

D. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below and support clamp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment.

3.3 PIPE ATTACHMENTS

A. For horizontal steel and wrought iron pipe, use carbon steel adjustable clevis hanger, Fig. 260. For floor support or support directly above steel beams, use adjustable pipe roll stand, Fig. 177.

B. For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper-plated, carbon steel adjustable swivel ring, Fig. CT-69.

C. When thermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of ½” axially, use adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, Fig. 181, or adjustable pipe roll stand, Fig. 177.

D. For horizontal cast iron soil pipe, use carbon steel adjustable clevis hanger, Fig. 260.

E. For vertical steel, wrought iron and cast iron pipe, use extension pipe or riser clamps, Fig. 261.

F. For vertical copper pipe and tube, use copper-plated, copper plated copper tubing riser pipe clamp, Fig. CT-121.

3.4 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS

A. Hanger rods: Carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140, 253 as required. Continuous threaded rod, Fig. 146 may be used wherever possible.

B. Chain wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe.

3.5 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS

A. For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete, use galvanized malleable iron universal concrete inserts; Fig. 282 for loads up to 1140 lbs.

B. For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C-clamps; Fig. 92, Fig. 93 or Fig. 94 with retaining clip Fig. 89 or Fig. 89X for loads up to 500 lbs; Fig. 218 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C-clamps; Fig. CT-138R for loads up to 180 lbs.


Project # 4181220


22 0529-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. For attaching steel hanger rods to wood structural members, use malleable iron ceiling flange; Fig. 153 for loads up to 1,270 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron ceiling flange: Fig. CT-128R for loads up to 180 lbs.

D. Vertical expansion shields or toggles shall not be used for suspending hanger rods, except with permission in cases where inserts have been omitted or cannot be used. If permitted, use expansion shields; for rod sizes up to ½”, 320 lbs. max. load. For hanger rods larger than ½” use attachment plate, Fig. 52, with wedge anchors.

E. Powder actuated anchoring methods shall not be used.

3.6 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION

A. Hangers and supports for insulated piping shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields in conjunction with hanger or roll device. Use Fig. 160 and 165, Protection Saddles.

3.7 SUPPLEMENTAL STEEL

A. Provide supplemental steel as required to hang or support plumbing equipment or piping.

END OF SECTION


IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT Project # 4181220 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 22 0553-1

SECTION 22 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide materials, equipment labor and supervision necessary to install piping identification products.

B. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length or color field, colors, and installed viewing angles of identification devices.


A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data.

B. Submit sample of each type of identification product and clearly identify the contents in a schedule.

C. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.

D. Schedule:

1. Submit valve schedule for each system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve ID tag number, system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves that are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags" in margin of schedule.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corp., Industrial Safety Supply, Emedco, Seton or Brimar.

B. Engineer approved alternative

2.2 PIPE MARKERS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid snap-on or self-sticking, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location or self-sticking pipe markers, fastened in the following method:

1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.

2. Secure to piping and install banding tape on both ends of each pipe label.

C. Lettering shall be manufacturer's pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance.


Project # 4181220


22 0553-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

D. Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic or on banding tape.

2.3 BRASS VALVE TAGS

A. Provide manufacturer's standard brass valve tags with stamped black filled lettering, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener.

B. Provide 1-1/2" round brass tags with black lettering. Seton 250 BL or equal.

2.4 VALVE TAG FASTENERS

A. Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain or solid brass S-hooks of sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves and manufactured specifically for that purpose.

2.5 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES

A. For each page of schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSD-grade sheet glass.

2.6 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Piping systems that shall be identified by their controls (including directional arrows) on this project shall include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Compressed Air.

2. Sanitary and sanitary vent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

B. Install pipe markers on each system, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow.

C. Locate pipe markers as follows: wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) above lay-in type ceilings and exterior non-concealed locations.

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures, mark each pipe at branch where there could be question of flow pattern.

3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, (both sides) or center non-accessible enclosures.

4. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

5. At each pipe passage to underground.


Project # 4181220

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 22 0553-3

6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50 feet along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25 feet in congested areas of piping and equipment.

7. Where self-sticking labels are used, the pipe or its covering surface shall be properly prepared. This consists of removal of loose dirt, oil and grease, loose paint or peeling insulation covering. This can be done with a brush and cloth; washing is not required. Use solvent for removal of oil or grease.

8. Banding tape must be used on both ends of all self-sticking labels. The tape shall encircle the pipe completely and overlap itself so the banding tape can adhere to itself.

D. List each tagged valve in schedule for each system showing function and location. Provide separate charts for mechanical divisions of work. Charts shall be installed on a conspicuous wall in the main mechanical equipment room. Provide unframed copies of valve lists as part of closeout documents.


A. Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or by other divisions.

B. Clean face of identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


22 0553-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


PROCESS DRAIN AND VENT PIPING


22 1315-1

SECTION 22 1315


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide equipment, materials, labor, and supervision necessary to install soil, waste, and vent system.


A. Current issue of building code.

B. Current issue local and Uniform plumbing code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product and performance data for equipment specified herein.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PROCESS DRAINS, SOIL, WASTE AND VENT MATERIALS

A. Materials

Material Service 1. Cast iron soil pipe, service weight,

bell and spigot, ASTM A74.

a. Asphalt coated. Process drain and storm sewers b. Uncoated. Aboveground soil, waste, vent, and

downspouts 3" diameter and over 2. Solid wall sched 40 PVC pipe

ASTM D2665 drain waste and vent.

Below ground soil, waste and vent piping.

B. Fittings

1. Material and strength of fittings for cast sewer pipes, clay sewer pipes, and concrete sewer pipe shall conform to pipe as per ASTM Standards.

2. Solid wall sched 40 PVC DWV – solvent cemented joints per ASTM D2665.

C. Joints

1. Vitrified clay and concrete pipe - pipe manufacturer's standard preformed preset plastic or rubber joint, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Amvit, Tylox or Kent.

2. Cast iron bell and spigot soil pipe - pipe manufacturer's standard preformed, preset plastic or rubber joint, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Cast iron no-hub pipe - coupling assembly tightened by torque wrench.

a. ASTM C-564, one piece neoprene compression gasket, CISPI 310, type 304, 18-8 chromium nickel stainless steel shield secured by two or more stainless steel worm drive clamps, FM approved, or ASTM C-564, one piece neoprene compression gasket, covered by ASTM A48/A48M cast iron coupling and secured by 18-8 stainless steel bolts and nuts.


Project # 4181220


22 1315-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

b. Manufacturers:

1) Clamp All: Hi-Torq 80

2) MG Coupling

3) Engineer approved equivalent

4) Copper water and drainage tube - use 95-5 tin antimony or silver solder, cut pipe square, clean and polish tube ends and inner surface of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. Use same methods for copper refrigerant pipe, except use silver solder with 15% silver content, equivalent to Sil-Flos 15.

5) Solid wall sched 40 PVC DWV – solvent cemented joints per ASTM D2665.

2.2 VENTS

A. Vents through the roof shall be cast iron and shall extend at least above the highest possible water level on the roof but in no case less than 12 inches.

B. Provide a flashing of 4 pound sheet lead for each vent through the roof. The flashing shall extend up around the pipe and turn down into it at least 2 in. and shall extend over the roof deck at least 1 ft. in each direction from the base.

C. Coordinate flashing of vents through the roof with [General][Roofing] Contractor.

D. Where vents through the roof are subject to frost or snow closure the vent termination shall be increased beginning at least 12 in. under the roof with a cast iron long increaser. Size increasers as follows:

Vent Size Increase To 1-1/4 in. and 1-1/2 in. 3 in. minimum 2 in. and 2-1/2 in. 4 in. minimum 3 in. 5 in. 4 in. 6 in.

2.3 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves passing through non-load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: For pipes 2-1/2" in size and smaller - 24-gauge; 3 in. to 6 in. - 22-gauge; over 6 in. - 20-gauge.

B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings, and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or cast iron pipe.

C. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material.

D. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2 in. above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1 in. above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound.

E. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or roofing shall be flashed and sealed.


Project # 4181220



22 1315-3

2.4 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide pipe escutcheons with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extensions, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.

B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

D. Manufacturer: Chicago Specialty; Producers Specialty; or Sanitary-Dash.

2.5 GUARDS

A. Where exposed insulated piping extends through floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 60 inches. Guard to be galvanized sheet steel not less than 26-gauge.

2.6 FIRE SAFING

A. Metal piping and sleeves passing through floors, roof, partitions and fire walls, shall be provided with firestop by packing space between pipe and sleeve with UL listed non-sag and self-leveling fire safing insulation per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Plastic piping passing through fire rated floors and fire rated walls shall be provided with firestop by providing intumescent wrap strip around the pipe, enclosed in steel collar attached to structure.

C. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use non-sag or self-leveling putty or caulking, one-piece intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL listed.

D. Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350oF (121 to 177oC), UL listed.

E. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective barrier against smoke, fire, toxic and combustible gases.

F. Unless protected, from possible loading or traffic, install firestopping materials in floors having void openings or four (4) inches or more to support the same floor load requirements.

G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide non-sag and self-leveling fire barrier caulk, wrap/strip, moldable putty and sheet forms of one of the following:

1. 3M Brand.

2. Flame Stop.

3. Dow Corning.

4. Metacaulk.


Project # 4181220


22 1315-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

2.7 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

B. Manufacturer: Thunderline.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install underground building drains as shown and in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.

B. Follow indicated lines generally, but make exact layout on the job to work actual fitting dimensions, align piping, and avoid interference. Provide proper support to maintain uniform fall of 1/4 in. per ft. for lines 3 in. and smaller and 1/8 in. per ft. for lines larger than 3 inches. Protect openings against the entrance of dirt.

C. No soil or waste pipe shall be covered by earth or construction without first being proved free of leaks by a hydrostatic test of at least 15-ft. head, witnessed by Architect/Engineer.

D. Install vents in practical alignment and supported with constant pitch back to the drainage system, concealed from finished spaces, unless shown or directed otherwise.

E. Soil, waste and vent connections to fixtures shall be accurately located and concealed from finished spaces, unless shown otherwise.

F. Refer to Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

G. Contractor shall verify existing tie-in invert elevations of process drain piping prior to installation of new piping. Coordinate the site sewer tie0in invert elevation with the site utility contractor. Existing tie-in inverts that are discovered to be different from the information on the bid documents shall be reported to the [General Contractor] [Construction Manager] and the Engineer immediately.

3.2 SLEEVES

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams, and foundations.

B. Install fire-proofing per manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Install escutcheons for pipes entering finished spaces.


Project # 4181220



22 1315-5

3.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install mechanical sleeve seals at all pipe penetrations through foundations below grade.

B. Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe and bolts and pressure plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form watertight seal.

3.5 PIPE PENETRATIONS

A. Penetrations shall be free of debris and dirt. Dam the penetration (when required) with an acceptable material. Apply fire stop material to the penetration per manufacturer's installation instructions. Use a caulking gun, putty knife or other normal trade tools. Remove damming materials where necessary after cure. Clean up with Xylene.

3.6 FIRE SAFING

A. Install fire safing at all penetrations through walls, floors, etc. per manufacturer's installation instructions as required to meet UL listing.

3.7 TESTING AND CLEANING

A. Flush out piping system with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items.

B. Hydraulically pressure test each section or segment of the system prior to backfilling, encasing, enclosing or otherwise preventing visual observation of the section or segment being tested.

C. Water test soil, waste and vent system at 10 feet of head for 4 hours. Test standpipe to be a minimum of 10 feet above the highest point of section being tested.

D. Testing shall be done in compliance with the [Uniform][Illinois] Plumbing Code.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


22 1315-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


PROCESS DRAIN PIPING SPECIALTIES


22 1318-1

SECTION 22 1318


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following process drainage piping specialties:

1. Floor drains.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping specialty components.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drains shall be Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade, Zurn, or as scheduled on drawings.

B. Drains without integral traps shall have service weight cast iron P traps.

C. Provide seepage pans of four pound sheet lead or chloraloy 240 plastic at least 3’-0” square for all floor drains over open space. Lead, if used, shall be thoroughly coated with asphaltum before it is placed in contact with concrete or concrete fill is poured over it.

D. Provide seepage pans of four-pound sheet lead or chloraloy 240 plastic to cover total area of showers over open spaces. Pan shall turn up at ends at least 9 inches and corners shall be folded and properly sealed.


Project # 4181220


22 1318-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

E. Flashing clamps and auxiliary drainage rims shall be provided for all drains that are to receive seepage pans.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.


Project # 4181220



22 1318-3

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


22 1318-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


GENERAL – SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING


22 1513-1

SECTION 22 1513


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Furnish equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install compressed air and vacuum systems.

B. Work under this section shall include furnishing, installing and testing complete piping systems for the compressed air and vacuum systems, including pipe, fittings, valves, and connection to outlets.

C. The system shall be complete in every respect and ready to place in operation prior to acceptance by the Owner.

1.2 STANDARDS AND CODES

A. Installer: A firm with at least 3 years of successful compressed air system installation experience.

B. UL Compliance: Provide equipment and components, which are UL listed and labeled.

C. ASME – Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

D. ASME B16.3 – Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings

E. ASME B16.26 – Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

F. ASME B31.3 – Process Piping

G. ASME B31.9 – Building Services Piping

H. ASTM A53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless

I. ASTM A234/A234M – Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures

J. ASTM D2513 – Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings

K. ASTM D2683 – Socket Type Polyethylene Fillings for Outside Diameter Controlled polyethylene pipe

L. MSS SP-80 – Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

M. MSS SP-110 – Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

N. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code


A. Deliver products with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components in factory-fabricated protective framing.

B. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to manufacturer for repairs or replacement.

C. Store products in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.


Project # 4181220


22 1513-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, piping schematics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Product Data: Product data shall indicate performance data relative to the information scheduled on the drawings. In addition, provide dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, compressor performance, motor electrical characteristics, and gauges and finishes of materials.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.

E. Test Reports: Submit inspector's certificate for air receiver for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance manual.

F. Certificates: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of air receiver.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until piping is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and equipment has been test run under observation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Polyethylene / Aluminum Composition Tubing: ASTM F1281 or ASTM 1282. ASME B31.1

1. Fittings and Joints: Brass compression type.

2.2 VALVES

A. General

1. Ball valves shall be used for shutoffs. Valves shall be certified for compressed air.

B. Ball Valves

1. Manufacturers

a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or engineer-approved equivalent:

1) Jamesbury

2) Apollo

3) Jenkins

4) Milwaukee


Project # 4181220



22 1513-3

5) Watts

6) Worchester

7) Powell

b. Provide ball valves complying with MSS SP-110. Ball valves for air shall be as follows unless otherwise shown on the drawings:

1) 2" and Smaller: ASTM B62 forged brass or bronze body, full port stainless steel, threaded or soldered ends with teflon seats and seals, tee or lever handle, blow-out proof stem.

C. Air Outlets

1. Couplers to be push-type with brass bodies and sleeves. Socket ends to be dichromate plated steel.

2. Coupler to have swivel-action body; a valve that shuts off airflow when disconnected and reopens when recoupled.

3. Quick-connect couplers shall be by Hansen, Parker or approved equivalent.

2.3 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS

A. Dielectric Connections

1. Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

B. Flexible Connector

1. Neoprene with brass threaded connectors.

2.4 HOSE REELS

A. Hose reels shall be fabricated with heavy gauge steel drum; four-direction, non-snag hose roller guide; and load-free, double-sealed, leak-proof swivel air connection with a flexible hose inlet. The unit shall be equipped with a lock ratchet for holding an extended hose tension-free, and a spring rewind motor for hose retraction. The ratchet device and rewind spring shall be encased within the steel drum. The reel shall be equipped with a 50 ft.-3/4 in. I.D. hose, rated for 250 psi at 170° F operating pressure and temperature.

B. Hose reel assembly to include a steel frame with integral mounting base for wall structure installation.

C. Hose reels shall be by Reelcraft, Hanney, Aeroquip, or approved equivalent.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.


Project # 4181220


22 1513-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General Requirements: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with ID to closely fit around pipe and tube and OD that completely covers opening.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Erection

1. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site of the system and shall be installed without springing or forcing. Pipe shall be protected against mechanical injury.

B. Supports

1. Shall be spaced correctly for adequate support of lines so the weight is on the supports and not on the joints.

2. For horizontal piping ¾" and larger, supports shall be 10 feet apart. For ½", they shall be 8 feet apart. On vertical lines, the supports shall be one to each story for piping 1" and smaller, and one support for each two stories for larger piping.

C. Install valved drip connections at low points in the compressed air system.

D. Install take-offs to outlets from top of main, with shutoff valve after take-off. Slope piping toward outlet.

E. Install compressed air couplings, female quick connectors, and pressure gauges where outlets are indicated.

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Blowing Out

1. After installation of the piping, but before installing the service outlet valves and before connecting the [vacuum pump and] air compressor, the lines shall be blown clear of moisture and foreign matter by means of oil-free, water-pumped nitrogen or compressed air.

B. Test

1. Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air piping system in accordance with ANSI B31.1

END OF SECTION


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC


23 0500-1

SECTION 23 0500


PART 1 GENERAL


A. The work shall include the furnishings of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division and as called for on the Mechanical Drawings to include supervision, quality control, operation, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete mechanical installation. The work shall also include the furnishing of necessary hoisting facilities to set materials and equipment in place and the furnishing of any scaffolding and transportation associated with this work.

B. Examine the project site and become familiar with existing conditions which will affect the work. Review the drawings and specifications of other trades and take note of conditions to be created which will affect the work. All conditions shall be considered in the preparation of bids; no additional compensation will be made on the behalf of this Contractor.

C. Provide labor necessary to demolish the existing mechanical system as shown on the drawings, as described in Part 3, Existing Conditions, or as required.

D. Where noted on the drawings or where called for in other sections of the specification, the Contractor for this division shall install equipment furnished by others, and shall make required service connections. Verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. This contractor shall be responsible for the removal and installation of railings, piping, ductwork, louvers, etc. as required to install new equipment. Coordinate shipping splits for all equipment provided by this contractor.

1.2 DAMAGE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the work of other trades or to the building and its contents, caused by equipment installation.

1.3 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Obtain and furnish necessary permits and inspection certificates for material and labor furnished. Permits and certificates shall be obtained from the proper inspection authorities. The cost of permits, certificates and fees required in connection with the installation shall be borne by the Contractor, unless otherwise noted in the detailed contractual description preceding these specifications. Where applications are required for the procuring of utility services to the building, see that such application is properly filed with the utility, and that information required for such an application is presented to the extent and in the form required by the utility company.


A. Applicable provisions of the following codes and standards are hereby imposed on a general basis for the mechanical work (in addition to specific applications specified by individual work sections of these specifications):

1. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 - 2010 Code for Energy Efficiency

2. ANSI Pressure Piping Standards (B31)

3. ASHRAE Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI B9.1)

4. AWWA Standards


Project # 4181220


23 0500-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

5. AWS Standards for Welding

6. National Electrical Code

7. Local and/or State Plumbing, Mechanical and Building Codes

8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

9. International Energy Conservation Code 2012

10. Uniform Plumbing Code

11. International Mechanical Code

12. NFPA Standards and Pamphlets

B. If any work indicated on the drawings or specified herein conflicts in any way with any of the rules and regulations of the above authorities, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing 72 hours before bids are opened. In the event the Contractor fails to notify the Architect/Engineer and changes are required by said conflicts, the Contractor shall make such changes as are required without additional cost to this Owner.

C. Installations must be safe in every respect, and must not create a condition which will be harmful to building occupants; to operating, installing or testing personnel; to workmen; or to the public. The contractor for each installation shall be solely responsible for providing installations which will meet these conditions. If the Contractor believes that the installation will not be safe for all parties, report these beliefs in writing to the Architect/Engineer before any equipment is purchased or work is installed, giving recommendations. The Architect/Engineer will work out required changes and adjustments in contract price where adjustments are warranted.

1.5 DRAWINGS

A. A complete set of drawings including civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings shall be on the site at all times. Prior to installing any of the work, check the drawings for dimensions and see that the work does not interfere with clearance required for ceilings, beams, foundations, finished columns, pilasters, partitions and electrical equipment as shown on the drawings and details. After work is installed and it develops that interferences occur which have not been called to the Architect/Engineer's attention before the installation, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make such changes in his work as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

B. The contract drawings for mechanical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement, the Contractor shall make such changes as directed by the Architect/Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner.

C. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be shown; but where such items are required by other sections of these specifications or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. Rough-in dimensions and locations shall be verified with the supplier of equipment furnished by other trades, or by the Owner, prior to the time of roughing-in.

D. Equipment specification may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified, or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such items are required, they shall be included by the supplier of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for.


Project # 4181220



23 0500-3

E. The drawings and the specifications are cooperative and supplementary. It is the intent of both said drawings and specifications to cover all mechanical requirements in their entirety as nearly as possible. The Contractor shall closely check the drawings and specifications for any obvious errors or omissions and bring any such condition to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to the receipt of bids, in order to permit clarification by means of a mailed Addendum. If there is no question prior to the bid proposal date, the Architect/Engineer shall assume that the drawings and specifications are complete and correct and will expect the intent of said documents to be complied with, and the installation to be complete in all respects, according to said intent.

F. Locate equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Minor deviations from the contract drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility, but changes of magnitude, or which involve extra cost, shall not be made without prior approval. Ample space shall be allowed for removal of parts that may require replacement or service in the future.

1.6 RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor's responsibility shall not end with the installation and connecting of the various apparatus. It shall include the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together with the qualified journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, install, connect, adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including equipment and materials furnished by other trades or by the Owner, until such time as the entire mechanical installation functions properly in every detail.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with other trades prior to installation.

B. No piping, ducts or equipment foreign to the electrical equipment or architectural appurtenances shall be run over the top of any electrical panels or electrical equipment, in accordance with NEC 110-16 and 384-4. This does not prohibit sprinkler protection for the installation.

C. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specifications are completed as an aid, but where discrepancies arise, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the required quantity.

D. Where the specifications state that equipment shall be furnished, installed or provided, it shall be understood to mean this Contractor shall furnish and install completely, unless it is specifically stated that the equipment is to be furnished and installed by others.

E. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between the piping and equipment of the various contractors. Conflicts between the drawings and specifications, or between requirements set forth for the various trades, shall be called to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required, and that the Contractor has submitted his bid in conformance with plans and specifications as issued and that no interference exists.

F. No piping, ducts or equipment foreign to an elevator hoistway and machine room shall be run inside the hoistway and machine room in accordance with NEC 620-37 and ASME A17.1, 102.2.


Project # 4181220


23 0500-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

1.8 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE

A. Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed to be free from defects and to be new equipment; no secondhand, used or salvaged equipment will be allowed.

B. Keep the entire portion of the work in repair, without additional cost to the Owner, so far as defects in workmanship, apparatus, material or construction are concerned for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, except as otherwise specified herein.

C. Equipment, which fails to meet performance ratings as specified and shown on the drawings, shall be removed and replaced by new equipment that meets the specified requirements, without additional cost to the Owner.

D. Materials and workmanship shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, in whose presence various tests shall be made as required by these specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCESS

A. Submit shop drawings and catalog data for mechanical equipment specified in Division 23 in accordance with Division 01.

B. Submittal data for mechanical equipment shall consist of shop drawings and/or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the material or equipment to include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance curves, rating, control sequence, and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating characteristics. Shop drawings shall be submitted on equipment and materials as required by the specifications.

C. Approval of materials, including alternate or substitute items, shall be obtained in writing from the Architect/Engineer, verbal approval will not be considered binding.

D. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall have been signed, checked, approved, and initialed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and will in so doing assume that the shop drawings conform to specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawing by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with elements of the specification. The name of the job, Architect/Engineer, location, and specification section shall appear on all pages of shop drawings. Equipment marks (such as EF-1, RTU-1) shall be indicated for each item.

E. At the completion of the job, furnish three (3) copies of parts lists, operating and maintenance instructions, and manuals organized and bound, in three books.

F. At the completion of the project, prepare and submit to the Owner record drawings showing the location of piping and ductwork. Drawing shall give accurate dimensions of such equipment for future use by the Owner. This drawing shall be submitted as soon as work is completed and before authorization of final payment.

2.2 SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIALS

A. Submit to the Architect/Engineer for review, when requested, a list of subcontractors, materials and equipment proposed to be used. The list must be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer before this Contractor may enter into any subcontractual agreement. Equipment, materials, and devices, etc. shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer, whether or not said items are herein specified.


Project # 4181220



23 0500-5

2.3 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials shall be new, complete with manufacturer's guarantee or warranty, and shall be as listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc., Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA), American Gas Association (AGA), Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI), etc., if a standard has been established by that agency for the type of material.

B. Materials shall also comply with applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, National Board of Fire Underwriters, National Fire Protection Association, National Safety Council, National Bureau of Standards, the National Electrical Code and the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. Such standards are hereby made a part of these specifications.

C. Work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner, and shall present a neat mechanical appearance when completed. Align, level and adjust equipment for satisfactory operation, and install so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily and so that parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation and maintenance. Methods and techniques of installation shall be subject to the review of the Architect/Engineer.

D. Materials shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product. Materials of the same type of class shall be the products of one manufacturer. For example, fans shall be from the same manufacturer and pumps from the same manufacturer.

E. Materials shall be protected from damage, and stored indoors or protected from the weather at all times, unless other storage arrangements are approved by the Architect/Engineer.

F. Bearing lubrication fittings shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be extended, where necessary, to an accessible location.

G. Material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2.4 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Proposals as submitted shall be based on the products specifically named in the specification or on the drawings. Material or equipment by manufacturers other than those specified may be used only by permission of the Architect/Engineer. Such permission for substitution must be requested, in writing in accordance with Division 01.

B. The Architect/Engineer reserves the sole right for the approval of proposed material or equipment, and the phrase, "or approved equivalent", used in these specifications, or on the drawings, shall be interpreted to mean an equivalent approved by the Architect/Engineer.

C. Changes required by alternate equipment shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner; and costs incurred by other trades, public utilities or the Owner, as a result of the use of such equipment, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Furnish to the Architect/Engineer, when requested, samples of proposed material or equipment substitutions. These samples shall remain with the Architect/Engineer as long as needed.

E. Identify the differences in alternate material or equipment as compared to that specified, and indicate the benefits to the project as a result of selecting the alternative.


Project # 4181220


23 0500-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

F. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse approval of equipment which does not meet the specification, in their opinion, or of equipment for which no local experience of satisfactory service is available. The Architect/Engineer further reserves the right to reject equipment for which maintenance service and the availability of replacement parts is questionable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Examine the existing building and become familiar with the conditions as they exist, or that will in any manner affect the work under this contract. No allowance will be made subsequently, in this connection, on behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence by the Contractor.

B. Existing equipment, such as duct or pipe, in or on the existing building and grounds which is to be replaced, or which interferes in any way with the remodeling of the existing facilities and/or installation of new equipment, shall be removed from the premises or relocated by this Contractor, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Do not remove from the premises, any equipment that may have maintenance value to the Owner without permission of the Owner. Equipment, duct or pipe not to be reused shall be removed from the premises, unless otherwise noted herein or shown on the drawings.

C. Where existing equipment is removed or changed, all duct and pipe no longer in service shall be removed and stubs plugged as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Building surfaces damaged and openings left by removal of equipment shall be repaired by the proper trades and paid for by this Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The cutting and fitting shall be done by this Contractor. The cutting of floor, ceiling or wall surfaces shall be done by this Contractor with extreme care, in order to avoid any disrupting or damage of existing utility services which may be encountered. Coordinate with other trades and with the General Contractor to minimize the damage to the building in order to reduce the amount of patching required.

D. Where new openings are cut and concealed piping is encountered, such items shall be removed or relocated as required. Where systems to be removed stub through floors, walls or ceilings, openings shall be patched so that no evidence of the former installation remains.

E. Existing active services (water, gas, sewer, electric), when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. If active services are encountered which require relocation, make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the utility or municipality having jurisdiction.

F. The location, size and elevation of underground utilities shown on the drawings are in accordance with data supplied by the Owner and/or the various utility companies. The Contractor shall verify this data and shall report any discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer before submitting his bid.

3.2 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE

A. Changes in service shall be made so as to provide a minimum of interference with the operation of services in the building. When changes require shutdown of building services, notify the proper building authorities no less than 24 hours in advance and obtain approval from these authorities before making changes. Such notices shall give duration and nature of shutdown. Temporary arrangements shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner.

B. Any and all interruptions to building services shall be in accordance with Division 01.


Project # 4181220



23 0500-7

3.3 OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING

A. The General Contractor shall coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure, as required for the installation of the mechanical work.

B. Furnish to the General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings. This shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional patching is required due to this Contractor's failure to inspect this work, this Contractor shall make arrangements for the patching required to properly close the opening, to include patch painting. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect.

C. When cutting and patching of the structure is made necessary due to this Contractor's failure to install piping, ducts, sleeves or equipment on schedule, or due to this Contractor's failure to furnish, on schedule, the information required for the leaving of openings, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements for this cutting and patching. This Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect.

D. Provide cutting and patching and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of the work. Furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. Extent of cutting shall be minimized. Use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required.

3.4 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. See Division 31 for requirements for trench excavation, backfill, and compaction.

3.5 CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORK

A. Concrete work included herein or shown on the drawings shall be done only by experienced cement finishers. Brickwork, where included, shall be laid only by experienced brick masons. Brick shall be of uniform size, hard burned, and shall be laid in cement mortar, except for patch work at a location where cement and lime mortar has previously been used. Exposed, finish brickwork shall match existing brickwork as closely as practical and shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and Owner.

B. Concrete bases and pads for mechanical equipment will be furnished by General Contractor. This Contractor shall coordinate size and location.

C. Furnish equipment anchor bolts and be responsible for their proper installation and accurate location.

3.6 PAINTING

A. The finish of any item that has been marred, scratched or damaged in any way by this Contractor shall be repainted at the expense of this Contractor, and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner.

B. Painting and finishing of exposed mechanical systems including piping and duct shall be as shown on the drawings and in DIVISION 09 - FINISHES.


Project # 4181220


23 0500-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3.7 CLEANING

A. Keep the premises clean of all debris, caused by the work as described in DIVISION 01.

B. At the conclusion of the construction, the site shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rubble, debris and unused material and shall be left in good order. Closed off spaces shall be cleaned of waste such as material, cartons, and wood frame members used in the construction.

3.8 WIRING FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. The electrical contractor will provide power to and connection of motors and equipment furnished by this Contractor. Where disconnect switches are not specified to be furnished with the equipment, the electrical Contractor will furnish disconnect switches for equipment furnished by this Contractor.

B. Provide integral wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring, temperature control wiring and interlock wiring for equipment furnished, whether or not such wiring is furnished by the equipment vendor.

C. Except where other Sections call for starters to be furnished by manufacturers as part of their equipment, the electrical contractor will furnish motor starters for motors furnished by this Contractor.

D. Furnish to the electrical contractor, shop drawings and a schedule for motors and other mechanical equipment furnished, which require electrical services. The schedule shall include the locations for rough-ins, electrical loads, size, and electrical characteristics for services required.

E. Additional costs incurred, where motors or equipment furnished by this Contractor require larger services or services of different electrical characteristics than those called for on the Electrical Drawings, due to the Contractor furnishing substitute equipment, shall be paid for by this Contractor.

F. Review the Electrical Drawings and call to the attention of the Architect/Engineer, prior to bidding, omissions of electrical services required for equipment.

G. Mechanical equipment which requires fuse protection, to maintain UL listing, shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor to provide such protection.

3.9 MOTORS

A. TEFC and ODP motors for equipment supplied by this contractor shall meet or exceed the listed values when tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 Method B as defined by NEMA Standard MG 1-12.6C. Efficiency values listed are based on NEMA Premium Efficiency Motors of NEMA MG 1-2003, Table 12-12 at 1800 RPM:

HP ODP TEFC

1 85.5 85.5

1.5 86.5 86.5

2 86.5 86.5

3 89.5 89.5

5 89.5 89.5

7.5 91.0 91.7

10 91.7 91.7

15 93.0 92.4

20 93.0 93.0


Project # 4181220



23 0500-9

25 93.6 93.6

30 94.1 93.6

40 94.1 94.1

50 94.5 94.5

60 95.0 95.0

75 95.0 95.4

100 95.4 95.4

125 95.4 95.4

150 95.8 95.0

200 95.8 95.0

B. All motors that are indicated to be used with Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) shall be inverter duty rated. Coordinate all motor requirements with the electrical contractor.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Special care shall be taken for the protection of equipment furnished by this Contractor. Equipment and material shall be protected from elements such as weather, painting and plastering until the project is completed. Damage from rust, paint or scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition.

B. Protection of equipment during the plastering and painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the contractor performing that work, but this shall not relieve this Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided.

C. Where the installation or connection of equipment requires this Contractor to work in areas previously finished by other contractors, this Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. This Contractor shall arrange with the other contractors for repairing and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged.

D. When heavy materials must be placed upon or transported over the roof deck, sheeting shall be placed to distribute the weight and support such materials. Any damage shall be immediately corrected at no cost to the Owner.

3.11 ASBESTOS IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL

A. In the event that suspected asbestos containing material (ACM) is encountered during the course of the work, cease operations in the immediate area and promptly notify the Architect/Engineer. Suspected materials will then be sampled and analyzed by the Owner. Should ACM be identified, the Owner's Representative will direct the procedures for abatement, either by subcontract to the Contractor or separate contractor. During abatement operations, cease operations in the immediate area of the abatement. Operations in other areas of the project may be performed, but care must be taken to control dust to avoid contamination of the abatement containment or air monitoring samples. The Contractor shall coordinate activities with the asbestos abatement contractor.

B. Should no ACM be identified, operations may be resumed. Delays caused by identification, analysis or abatement may be added to the time of the contract, at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer by Change Order.


Project # 4181220


23 0500-10 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

3.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Be responsible for the installation of all equipment in such a manner as to control the transmission of noise and vibration from any installed equipment or system, so that the sound level does not exceed NC35 in any occupied space. Be responsible for the correction of any objectionable noise in any occupied area due to improperly installed equipment.

3.13 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS

A. Systems shall be tested and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to the Owner.

B. Prior to acceptance of the mechanical installation, demonstrate to the Owner or his designated representatives essential features and functions of all systems installed, and instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems.

C. Furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions, and arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives for the system present to assist with the demonstrations. The Owner and Contractor shall each sign a certification stating that the training has been performed and the Owner accepts same.

END OF SECTION


VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT Project # 4181220 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 23 0548-1

SECTION 23 0548

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This specification pertains to the furnishing and installation of vibration isolation devices for HVAC piping and rotating or reciprocating mechanical equipment.

B. This work shall include all material and labor required for installation of the resilient mounting and suspension systems, adjusting each mounting system, and measurement of isolator system performance when so requested by the Architect/Engineer. Specific mounting arrangements for each item of mechanical equipment shall be as described herein and as indicated by schedules and details on the drawings.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. All rotating mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration isolators. The isolators and bases shall be as tabulated on the Vibration Isolation Schedule in this section. Any equipment not listed in this schedule shall be isolated with the isolator type and deflection shown in the 2007 ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, Chapter 47, Table 48.

B. Vibration isolators and bases shall be as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, Mason Industries, Amber Booth or approved equivalent, and shall all be provided by the mechanical contractor form a single manufacturer to assure single responsibility for the performance of all isolation equipment. The isolator manufacturer's submittal shall include a tabulation of the design data with dimensions for both free and operating heights of the isolators.

C. Engage manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support isolation units produced, and of associated inertia bases.

D. The Contractor and the vibration isolation manufacturer or his regularly designated and factory authorized representative shall perform the following tasks in addition to the supply and installation of isolation equipment:

1. Obtain from the Architect/Engineer the approved manufacturer's name, model number, and other necessary identifying data for each item of mechanical equipment to be resiliently mounted. Coordinate resilient mounting systems with the exact equipment to be furnished in regard to physical size, isolator locations, weight, rotating speed, etc. Direct contact and cooperation between the vibration isolation device fabricator and the equipment manufacturer will be required.

2. Provide on-the-job supervision as required during installation of resiliently mounted equipment and piping to assure that vibration isolators are installed in strict accordance with normally accepted practices for critical environments.

3. Replace, at no extra cost to the Owner, isolators which do not produce the required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct operating height, or which do not produce the required isolation.

4. Cooperate with other contractors engaged in this project so that the installation of vibration isolation devices will proceed in a manner that is in the best interests of the Owner.


Project # 4181220


23 0548-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

5. Notify the Architect/Engineer of project conditions which affect vibration isolation system installation of performance and which are found to be different from conditions indicated by the drawings or described by the specifications. Should vibrations isolation system installation proceed without such notifications, remedial work required to achieve proper isolator performance shall be accomplished by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

6. Be alert for possible short-circuiting of vibration isolation systems by piping supports, electrical connections, temperature control connections, drain lines, building construction, etc., and notify the involved contractor as to these problems or potential problems. Where such situations cannot be easily resolved, notify the Architect/Engineer so that preventive or remedial action can take place on a timely basis. Remedial measures required shall be undertaken by the contractor responsible at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Vibration isolation products furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.

F. Refer to other sections of these specifications for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets and other work related to vibration isolation work.

G. Where equipment manufacturer's recommendations differ from specified vibration isolation, submit to Architect for approval.

H. Furnish templates to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, detailed drawings, performance characteristic data and installation instructions for each type of unit required. Indicate equipment to be installed with isolator, tabulation of design data with dimensions for both free and operating heights of isolators, and load on each.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: A.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The vibration isolation systems described herein and identified by type number designations shall be applied to specific classifications of mechanical equipment as indicated in the Vibration Isolation Schedule.

2.2 TYPE 1 ISOLATORS (RUBBER & GLASS FIBER PADS AND HANGERS)

A. Pre-compressed Molded Fiberglass Vibration Isolation Pads, individually coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Pads shall be fine (.00018 dia.) bonded annealed glass fibers which have been stabilized during manufacture by overloading the material ten times. Pads shall have a constant natural frequency over the operating load range, and the stiffness shall increase proportionately with load applied. Pads shall be no taller than the shortest horizontal dimension. Where the equipment base does not provide a uniform load surface, steel plates shall be bonded to the top of the pads. Alternately, Neoprene Mounts incorporating completely enclosed metal inserts to permit bolting the supported unit may be used.


Project # 4181220


AND EQUIPMENT Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 23 0548-3

2.3 TYPE 2 ISOLATORS (PAD AND HANGER TYPE)

A. Molded isolators shall come in a range of 30 to 70 durometer and shall be designed for up to ½" deflection.

B. Hangers shall be designed for a 20° to 35° misalignment.

2.4 TYPE 3 ISOLATORS (SPRINGS)

A. Freestanding, Unhoused, Laterally Stable Steel Springs with leveling bolts and ¼-in. thick ribbed isolation pads. To assure stability, the spring shall have a lateral spring stiffness equal to the rated vertical stiffness, and shall be designed to provide 50% overload capacity. In capacities up to 5,000 lbs., springs shall be replaceable. In capacities over 5,000 lbs., springs shall be welded to the top and bottom load plate assemblies.

B. Combination Spring and Rubber Hangers. The pre-compressed fiberglass shall be coated with a moisture impervious elastomeric membrane in series with springs, all encased in welded steel brackets. Springs shall be as specified for Type 3 isolators. Hangers shall be designed for 50% overload capacity, and shall accommodate rod misalignment over a 30° arc. Brackets shall be designed to carry 500% overload without failure.

2.5 TYPE 4 ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable Spring Isolators with vertical limit stops to assure a constant operating height if the supported weight is removed, and to reduce movement due to wind loads. Limit stops shall be isolated from the housing to prevent short-circuiting.

2.6 TYPE A BASES

A. No base required. Isolators may be attached directly to the supported equipment.

2.7 TYPE B BASES

A. Structural Steel Base, designed and supplied by reducing the mounting height of equipment. To assure adequate stiffness, the height of the members shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, or at least 6 inches. Where thinner sections are necessary due to head room limitations, the section modulus of the members selected shall be equivalent to or exceed the section modulus of wide flange steel members whose thickness is 8% of the longest span between isolators.

2.8 TYPE C BASES

A. Reinforces Concrete Inertia Base, the steel members of which are designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. The concrete shall be poured into a welded steel frame with pre-located equipment anchor bolts, ½-in. diameter reinforcing bars on nominal 8-in. centers each way, and recessed isolator mounting brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment, but yet remain within the confines of the base. The thickness of the base shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, at least 6 in., or as indicated on the drawings. Where inertia bases are used to mount pumps, the bases shall be wide enough to support piping elbows.


Project # 4181220


23 0548-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

2.9 TYPE D BASES

A. Roof Curb Isolators: Fabricated frame units sized to match roof curbs as shown, formed with isolation springs between extruded aluminum upper and lower sections, which are shaped and positioned to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Provide continuous airtight and waterproof seal between upper and lower extrusions. Include provisions for anchorage of frame unit to roof curb, and for anchorage of equipment to unit. Equivalent to Mason Type CMAB or RSC as required.

2.10 DUCTWORK ISOLATION

A. Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one of the following:

1. Elgen Manufacturing Co.

2. Duro Dyne Corporation

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.11 PIPING ISOLATION

A. Piping over 1 in. diameter in mechanical equipment rooms, and piping three supports away from other mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolators.

B. Suspended piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Hangers.

C. Floor mounted piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Isolators (spring mounts).

D. Flexible members shall be incorporated in the piping adjacent to all equipment housing pipe connections (cooling tower, unit heaters, air handling units, chillers, etc.).

2.12 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO RESILIENTLY MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical connections to equipment which is supported or suspended by vibration isolators shall be made with long lengths of flexible conduit or flexible armored cable. These flexible connections must be located so as to prevent rigid conduit connections between the resiliently mounted equipment and the building structure.

2.13 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

EQUIPMENT TYPE ON GRADE UP TO 20 FT FLR SPAN

20 TO 30FT FLR SPAN

20 TO 30FT FLR SPAN

PROPELLER FANS TYPE B-I

MIN DFL

TYPE E B-I

MIN DFL

TYPE E B-I

MIN DFL

TYPE E B-I

MIN DFL

WALL MOUNTED A-1 0.25 A-1 0.25 A-1 0.25 A-1 0.25

ROOF MOUNTED A-1 0.25 A-1 0.25 B-4 1.75 D-4 1.75


Project # 4181220


AND EQUIPMENT Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 23 0548-5

BASE TYPES: ISOLATOR TYPES: A. NO BASE, ISOLATORS ATTACHED DIRECTLY TO EQUIPMENT

1. PAD, RUBBER, OR GLASS FIBER

B. +PAD, RUBBER, OR GLASS FIBER 2. RUBBER FLOOR ISOLATOR OR HANGER

C. CONCRETE INERTIA BASE 3. SPRING FLOOR ISOLATOR OR HANGER

D. CURB-MOUNTED BASE 4. RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATOR 5. THRUST RESTRAINT (SEE ASHRAE

HANDBOOK)

PART 3 INSTALLATION

3.1 EXECUTION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for the installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation.

B. Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.

C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly.

D. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Refer to other section of these Specifications for the installation of flexible pipe connectors.

E. Install vibration isolators that are furnished with equipment.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


23 0548-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


23 0553-1

SECTION 23 0553


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide materials, equipment labor and supervision necessary to install piping identification products.

B. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length or color field, colors, and installed viewing angles of identification devices.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Brady Corp., Industrial Safety Supply, Emedco, Seton or Brimar.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT MARKERS

A. Provide engraved signage nameplates and tags constructed of multi-layered acrylic that has been treated for outdoor use and can withstand temperatures up to 160° F. Nameplates shall have beveled edges with contrasting color core, letters, and border. Minimum size of nameplate shall be 3" high by 6" long. The minimum letter height shall be 3/4". Attachment shall be by double faced 2 mil permanent acrylic adhesive. For equipment that doesn't allow for direct attachment, furnish sheet metal backing to integrate with equipment such that signage can be read from 5 feet above the finished floor. Unless noted otherwise, signage shall be provided with black lettering, black border, and yellow core. All signage shall include up to 14 characters per line, minimum of 3 lines per tag.

B. All equipment shall be named consistent with the plans and specifications as indicated on the schedules or as directed by the Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions.

B. Clean face of identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Equipment/Ductwork

1. Exhaust fans.

2. Louvers

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


23 0553-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC


23 0593-1

SECTION 23 0593


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Testing and balancing shall be performed by an independent certified testing and balancing contractor. The Contractor shall be certified by the AABC (American Association of Balancing Contractors), NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau), or SMARTA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning and Roofing Trade Association). The Balancing Contractor shall provide labor, services, and test equipment required to test, adjust, and balance the specified systems. Personnel involved in the execution of the work under the Balancing Contract shall be experienced and trained in the total balancing of mechanical systems, as well as being regular employees of the Balancing Contractor.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.

C. Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Division 01.

D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

E. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outline indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required.

F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

G. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

1.4 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems installation and schedule completion of balancing work before Substantial Completion of Project.

B. Do not proceed with balancing work until systems scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing are clean and free from debris, dirt, and discarded building materials.


Project # 4181220


23 0593-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 OTHER CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Mechanical and Plumbing Contractors shall cooperate with the balancing agency by:

1. Putting complete system into operation during duration of balancing period.

2. Providing up-to-date set of Drawings and advising immediately of changes made to the system during construction.

3. Providing complete submittal information for mechanical equipment complete with pertinent engineering information.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions.

1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.

2. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

3. Fans are rotating correctly.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Exhaust fans: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 of design for exhaust systems.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostat to specified settings.

E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.


Project # 4181220



23 0593-3

3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowance for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.

L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries, 0.02 inches positive static pressure in __________ and -0.02 inches negative static pressure at __________.

M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control.

N. On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust air flow switches for proper operation.

O. Air ducts with electric heating coils shall be adjusted to allow coil to energize at minimum air flow conditions.

3.7 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.


Project # 4181220


23 0593-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.

G. Three way valves shall be tested and balanced for flow capacities at full coil flow and full bypass flow, as indicated on the drawings or at a maximum coil flow, whichever is less.

3.8 SCHEDULES

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

1. Sprinkler Air Compressor

2. Electric Water Coolers

3. Unit Air Conditioners

4. Air Coils

5. Evaporative Humidifier

6. Sprayed Coil Dehumidifier

7. Terminal Heat Transfer Units

8. Air Filters

9. Controls Compressor

B. OUTDOOR AIR VENTILATION DATA

1. Air Handling Units shall be tested and balanced for the following conditions:

a. Leakage when the outdoor air damper is in the closed position and the unit is operating at 100% scheduled speed. Adjust damper if required to reduce leakage to the maximum allowable leakage rate as specified.

b. Capacity as scheduled on the drawings

c. VAV systems only: Capacity of outdoor air when the air handling unit is at 50% capacity and outdoor air damper is set for the scheduled air flow.

2. Coordinate testing with the temperature controls contractor and identify the % actuator stroke correlating with the above capacities.

3. Submit this in report form to the engineer prior to submitting final report.


Project # 4181220



23 0593-5

C. REPORT FORMS

1. Title Page:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency

b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency

c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency

d. Project name

e. Project location

f. Project Architect

g. Project Engineer

h. Project Contractor

i. Project altitude

j. Report date

2. Summary Comments:

a. Design versus final performance

b. Notable characteristics of system

c. Description of systems operation sequence

d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization

e. Nomenclature used throughout report

f. Test conditions

3. Instrument List:

a. Instrument

b. Manufacturer

c. Model number

d. Serial number

e. Range

f. Calibration date

4. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer

b. Model/Frame

c. HP/BHP.

d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load

e. RPM

f. Service factor

g. Starter size, rating, heater elements

h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore


Project # 4181220


23 0593-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

5. V-Belt Drive:

a. Identification/location

b. Required driven RPM

c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM

d. Belt, size and quantity

e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM

f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual

6. Cooling Coil Data:

a. Identification/number

b. Location

c. Service

d. Manufacturer

e. Air flow, design and actual

f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual

g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual

h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual

i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual

j. Water flow, design and actual

k. Water pressure drop, design and actual

l. Entering water temperature, design and actual

m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual

n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual

o. Air pressure drop, design and actual

p. Type of refrigerant for DX coils

q. Coils with 3 way control valves shall have flow measured at full coil flow and full bypass flow. The bypass balancing valve shall be adjusted for flow as indicated on the drawings or at a maximum coil flow, whichever is less.

7. Steam Coil Data:


b. Location

c. Service

d. Manufacturer


f. Steam pressure and temperature

g. Entering air temperature, design and actual

h. Leaving air temperature, design and actual

i. Air pressure drop, design and actual


Project # 4181220



23 0593-7

8. Heating Coil Data:


b. Location

c. Service

d. Manufacturer


f. Water flow, design and actual

g. Water pressure drop, design and actual

h. Entering water temperature, design and actual

i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual

j. Entering air temperature, design and actual

k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual

l. Air pressure drop, design and actual

m. Coils with 3 way control valves shall have flow measured at full coil flow and full bypass flow. The bypass balancing valve shall be adjusted for flow as indicated on the drawings or at a maximum coil flow, whichever is less.

9. Duct Traverse:

a. System zone/branch

b. Duct size

c. Area

d. Design velocity

e. Design air flow

f. Test velocity

g. Test air flow

h. Duct static pressure

i. Air temperature

j. Air correction factor

10. Air Monitoring Station Data:

a. Identification/location

b. System

c. Size

d. Area

e. Design velocity

f. Design air flow

g. Test velocity

h. Test air flow


Project # 4181220


23 0593-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

11. Flow Measuring Station:


b. Location

c. Size

d. Manufacturer

e. Model number

f. Serial number

g. Design flow rate

h. Design pressure drop

i. Actual/final pressure drop

j. Actual/final flow rate

k. Station calibrated setting

END OF SECTION


FANS


23 3416-1

SECTION 23 3416

FANS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The extent of work is shown on drawings and in schedules and by requirements of this section, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation:

1. Propeller fans

2. Fan accessories

3. Motors and drives


A. Installer: A firm with at least 3 years of successful fan installation experience.

B. AMCA Standards: Comply with air movement and control association standards as applicable to testing and rating fans, including but not limited to, AMCA 99, 210, 211, 261, 300, 301. Provide fans that bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance.

C. UL Compliance: Provide fan and components which are UL listed and labeled.

D. SMACNA Standards: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA duct construction standards.

E. Grease hood exhaust fans shall be UL listed for grease removal (UL762)


A. Deliver products with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components in factory-fabricated protective framing.

B. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to manufacturer for repairs or replacement.

C. Store products in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.

B. Product Data: Product data shall indicate performance data relative to the information scheduled on the drawings. In addition, provide dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and gauges and finishes of materials.

C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.

D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet and radiation at rated capacity.

E. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring clearly indicating factory installed and field installed wiring.

F. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.


Project # 4181220

FANS 23 3416-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or engineer approved equivalent:

1. Greenheck

2. Penn Barry

3. Trane

4. Cook

5. Twin City Fan

6. Acme

2.2 GENERAL

A. Provide fans of type, sizes, ratings and capacities as indicated on drawings and in schedules.

2.3 PROPELLER FANS

A. Propeller: Shaped steel or steel reinforced aluminum blade with heavy hubs, statically and dynamically balanced, keyed and locked to shaft, directly connected to motor.

B. Motors and drives shall be scheduled on the Drawings. On direct drive units, motors shall be resiliently mounted in basket type guards of heavy-duty steel in a concentric ring pattern.

C. Frame: One piece, square 14 gauge steel with die formed venturi orifice, mounting flanges and supports, with baked enamel finish.

D. Fans shall be UL705 listed. AMCA certified.

E. Accessories

1. Outlet damper: Multiple blade with offset hinge pin, blades linked, line voltage motor drive, power open, spring return.

2. Safety Screens: Expanded galvanized metal over inlet, motor, and drive; to comply with OSHA regulations.

3. Controller: Solid-state speed controller.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Installer shall examine areas and conditions under which fans are to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.


Project # 4181220

FANS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 23 3416-3

3.2 INSTALLATION OF FANS

A. Install fans where shown in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions, recognized industry practices, and in accordance with National Electrical Code, to insure compliance with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, vibration isolation, and electrical work, as necessary to interface installation of fans with other work.

C. Temporary Closure: Upon completion of installation, provide protective covering on fan ductwork connection openings to prevent entrance of dust and debris into equipment.

D. Install vibration isolators and flexible electrical leads to properly isolate the fan vibration from the structure.

E. Provide all direct drive fans with a fan speed controller for balancing.

F. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

G. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Insure that the fan is wired properly for proper fan rotation .

B. Provide positive electrical motor grounding.

3.4 TESTING

A. After installation of fans has been completed, test each fan to demonstrate proper operation of unit at performance requirements specified, including, but not limited to, proper rotation of impeller. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected at no additional cost to owner.

3.5 MANUFACTURER’S START-UP SERVICES

A. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer without additional charge to start the unit(s).

3.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220

FANS 23 3416-4 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


WALL LOUVERS


23 3700-1

SECTION 23 3700

WALL LOUVERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to furnish and install:

1. Shop fabricated louver and frame

2. Head and sill flashing to adjacent work

3. Bird screening

4. Attachment hardware

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

1. Clearly indicate, in large scale, profile of frame and installation details, relation to adjacent construction, flashing blade configuration, bird and insect screens, and insulated damper and frame.

B. Product Data

1. Provide louver schedule indicating each louver location, size, free area, water penetration, airflow, and associated pressure drop.

2. Accessory information.

3. Color/finish information and color selection materials.

C. See Volume 1 - Division 01 for additional submittal requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Louvers shall be model as scheduled on drawings or an equivalent model approved in advance from the following manufacturers:

1. Ruskin

2. Greenheck.

3. Airolite.

4. Louvers and Dampers

5. Pottorff.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Horizontal Line (Continuous Blade) HVAC Louver

1. Frame and blades: 0.063-inch thick. Extruded aluminum, two inches deep, Type 6063-T5 aluminum.


Project # 4181220

WALL LOUVERS 23 3700-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018

2. Bird Screen: 1/2-inch mesh, 16-gauge aluminum, secured in removable aluminum frame.

3. Provide extended sill flashing.

4. Drainable blade.

5. Finish to be Kynar 500 fluoropolymer coating (70% PVDF) in standard color as selected by architect. 10 year warranty on standard finish colors.

6. Design shall incorporate structural supports to withstand 20 psf wind loads.

7. Blades shall be spaced 1” nominal on center.

8. Intermediate support mullions shall not interrupt exterior appearance.

9. Size shall be as shown on drawings.

B. Performance

1. The louver shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal for water penetration and air performance.

2. The louver shall have a water penetration effectiveness greater than 99.4% with a ventilation air free area velocity of 307 fpm and rainfall rate of 3 in/hr and wind velocity of 29 mph.

3. Reference drawings for cfm and louver sizes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure openings affecting this work are properly prepared and that flashings are correctly located to divert moisture to exterior.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install louvers in openings properly aligned and level.

B. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, architectural details, and mechanical details.

C. Secure louver rigid with concealed fasteners of non-corrosive metals to suit materials as being encountered.

D. Coordinate installation method with application of exterior materials and mechanical work.

E. Set and tie into flashings to ensure diversion of moisture to exterior.

F. Install removable bird screens.

G. Caulk around louvers to form seal with surrounding building materials. Verify proper drainage through weep holes following caulking.

END OF SECTION


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL


26 0500-1

SECTION 26 0500


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.

3. Sleeve seals.

4. Grout.

5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.


Project # 4181220


26 0500-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with applicable provisions of Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), NFPA Standards and Pamphlets, NEIS Standards, and common work place practice.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.


Project # 4181220



26 0500-3

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm)above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


26 0500-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES Project # 4181220 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 26 0519-1

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Wiring connectors.

C. Electrical tape.

D. Wire pulling lubricant.

E. Cable ties.


A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.


A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014).

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).

E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.

F. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.

G. NEMA WC 70 - Nonshielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; 2009.

H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2013.

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

J. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.




http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20B787/B787M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D3005

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NECA%20NEIS%201

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20WC%2070

http://www.netaworld.org/

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2070

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%2044


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20486A

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20486C

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20486D



Project # 4181220


26 0519-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F (-10 degrees C), unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

G. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20WC%2070




Project # 4181220


CABLES Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 26 0519-3

H. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

I. Minimum Conductor Size: 12 AWG.

J. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

K. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape.

3. Color Code:

a. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

2.2 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Building Wire:

a. General Cable

b. Nexans Energy USA

c. The Okonite Company

d. Prysmian Power Cables and Systems: www.us.prysmian.com

e. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.

f. Superior Essex

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20B787/B787M




Project # 4181220


26 0519-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.

2.3 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.

B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 0526.

C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.

2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors.

D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs.

2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.

3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required.

E. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F (105 degrees C) for standard applications and 302 degrees F (150 degrees C) for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

F. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.

G. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.

H. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20486A

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20486C

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20486D


Project # 4181220



04-05-2018 26 0519-5

2.4 WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Tape:

1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F (105 degrees C).

2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C) and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F (105 degrees C).

B. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature.

C. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft (3.0 m) of location indicated.

4. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.

5. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20D3005






Project # 4181220


26 0519-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the following conditions:

a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors.

b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating.

c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors.

7. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

D. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.

3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

G. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.

H. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each outlet.

I. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.

J. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.

K. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.





Project # 4181220



04-05-2018 26 0519-7

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

L. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

M. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

N. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

P. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.


A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION




Project # 4181220


26 0519-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018


CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


26 0533.13-1

SECTION 26 0533.13


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

C. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

D. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

E. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

F. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.

H. Conduit fittings.

I. Accessories.


A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.


A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.

C. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC); 2005.

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.

E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013.

F. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); 2003.

G. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2012.

H. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2005.

I. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013.

J. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; 2015.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

L. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20C80.1





http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NECA%20111

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20FB%201

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20RN%201

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20TC%202





Project # 4181220


26 0533.13-2 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

M. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.


B. Sequencing:

1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.



B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20514B







Project # 4181220



26 0533.13-3

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:

1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.

2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit.

3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use rigid PVC conduit.

4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground.

5. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

6. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) on either side of where conduit emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

D. Embedded Within Concrete:

1. Within Slab on Grade: Not permitted.

2. Within Slab Above Ground: Not permitted.

E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:

a. Where exposed below 8 feet (2.4 m), except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.

K. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

L. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.

1. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m).


Project # 4181220


26 0533.13-4 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

M. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:

1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.

2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

3. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m) unless otherwise indicated.

4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:

a. Transformers.

b. Motors.

N. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.

2.2 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.

C. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

E. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

F. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.












Project # 4181220



26 0533.13-5

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.


3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.5 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil (1.02 mm).

C. PVC-Coated Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.


4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil (1.02 mm).

D. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil (0.38 mm).

2.6 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.


2.7 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.

B. Fittings:






http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20RN%201












Project # 4181220


26 0533.13-6 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

2.8 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.

B. Fittings:


2. Material: Use steel.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) type.

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

b. Do not use set-screw type connectors and couplings.

4. Damp or Wet Locations (where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.

5. Embedded Within Concrete (where permitted): Use fittings listed as concrete-tight. Fittings that require taping to be concrete-tight are not acceptable.

2.9 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

B. Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil (0.51 mm).

B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed.

C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force (890 N).

E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.

F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be installed.












Project # 4181220



26 0533.13-7

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer.

F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.

G. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.

b. Mechanical equipment rooms.

c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:

a. Across floors.

b. Across roofs.

c. Across top of parapet walls.

d. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points.






Project # 4181220


26 0533.13-8 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

9. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet (46 m) between pull points.

10. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.

11. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect.

12. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) between conduits and piping for other systems.

13. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches (300 mm) between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to:

a. Heaters.

b. Hot water piping.

c. Flues.

14. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.

H. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

4. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits.

5. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

6. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.

7. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.

8. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ, comply with the most stringent requirements.

I. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors.

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.




Project # 4181220



26 0533.13-9

6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.

7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.

8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

J. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.

6. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetrate exterior wall below grade.

7. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane.

8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.

9. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

K. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.

2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

L. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.

2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

M. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches (300 mm) at each end.


Project # 4181220


26 0533.13-10 Issued for Bid 04-05-2018

N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

O. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 0553.



B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION


PANELBOARDS


26 2416-1

SECTION 26 2416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.


A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Revision E with Supplement 1, 2013.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.

C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2015.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.

E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; 2011.

F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.

G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2013.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted panelboards where indicated.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=W-C-375



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20250

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20PB%201

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI/NEMA%20PB%201.1




http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%2050E





Project # 4181220

PANELBOARDS 26 2416-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where acceptable, series rated systems.

D. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA PB 1 as routine tests.

E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements.

H. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.





A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.





Project # 4181220

PANELBOARDS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 26 2416-3

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.


A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards:

1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F (-5 degrees C) and 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.

B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

D. Siemens Industry, Inc.: www.usa.siemens.com.

E. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.

2.2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:

a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating matching existing circuit breakers

b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated.

3. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.

b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.

5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.

6. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

7. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.



Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch (27 mm) trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.

E. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.

F. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation.

G. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent protective device coordination study performed according to Section 26 0573.

H. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

I. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 0553.



B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.

C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.






Project # 4181220

PANELBOARDS Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 26 2416-5

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION


Project # 4181220


04-05-2018


INTERIOR LIGHTING


26 5100-1

SECTION 26 5100

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Interior luminaires.

B. Ballasts and drivers.

C. Luminaire accessories.


A. 47 CFR 15 - Radio Frequency Devices; current edition.

B. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011.

C. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Cor 1, 2012).

D. IESNA LM-63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008).

E. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products; 2008.

F. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages, Arrays, and Modules; Illuminating Engineering Society; 2015.

G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.

H. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; 2006.

I. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006.

J. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2011.

K. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012.

L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

M. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.

N. UL 1598C - Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Retrofit Luminaire Conversion Kits; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

http://www.ecfr.gov/

http://www.nema.org/search/results-search.cfm?query=ansi+c82.11&submit=GO

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IEEE%20C62.41.2

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IES%20LM%2063

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IES%20LM%2079

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=IES%20LM-80



http://www.neca-neis.org/standards/index.cfm?fuseaction=general&subcategory=33


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20LE%204



https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%201598C




Project # 4181220

INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5100-2 Issued for Bid

04-05-2018


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. LED Luminaires:

a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.

D. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed.

E. Field quality control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components.




Project # 4181220

INTERIOR LIGHTING Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 26 5100-3




C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.


A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.

C. Provide three year full warranty for fluorescent emergency power supply units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

2.2 LUMINAIRES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.





Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

G. LED Luminaires:

1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

2.3 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS

A. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements:

1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

3. Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Inrush currents not exceeding peak currents specified in NEMA 410.

4. Operate for at least 50,000 hours at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.

5. Provide thermal fold-back protection by automatically reducing power output (dimming) to protect LED driver and LED light engine/fixture from damage due to over-temperature conditions that approach or exceed the LED driver's maximum operating temperature at calibration point

6. Provide integral recording of operating hours and maximum operating temperature to aid in troubleshooting and warranty claims.

7. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges incurred during manufacturing, installation, or field troubleshooting without impairment of performance when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.

8. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD S20.20.

9. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

10. NRTL Type TL rated where possible to allow for easier fixture evaluation and listing of different driver series.

11. UL 1598C listed for field replacement as applicable.

12. Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.

13. Class A sound rating; inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.

14. Demonstrate no visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent change in line-voltage input.

15. LED drivers of the same family/series to track evenly across multiple fixtures at all light levels.

16. Employ integral fault protection up to 277 V to prevent LED driver damage or failure in the event of incorrect application of line-voltage to communication link inputs.







https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%201598C


Project # 4181220

INTERIOR LIGHTING Issued for Bid

04-05-2018 26 5100-5

B. LED Drivers

1. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 50/60 Hz.

2. Complies with FCC requirements of 47 CFR 15, for commercial applications at 120-277 V and residential applications at 120 V.

3. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at maximum power; complies with ANSI C82.11.

4. Class 2 output designed to withstand hot swap of LED loads; meets UL 1310 and CSA C22.2 No. 223.

5. Driver outputs to be short circuit protected, open circuit protected, and overload protected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).

E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

G. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.



B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.




Project # 4181220


04-05-2018

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

D. Test fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.

E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION